1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 is a document preparation system.
247 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
248 scripts, publishable books, business
249 letters and proposals,
250 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
254 It is unlike most other
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
264 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
280 pt type, left justified, 5
281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
290 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
294 \begin_layout Standard
295 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
300 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
304 \begin_layout Standard
309 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
310 's philosophy: most importantly,
311 the format of all of the manuals.
312 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
313 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
314 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
317 \begin_layout Section
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
324 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
326 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
327 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
333 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
334 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
336 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
337 only a vertical scrollbar.
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
342 The first case is large images.
343 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
344 the image and use the option
355 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
358 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
361 \begin_layout Standard
362 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
363 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
371 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
378 \begin_layout Section
382 \begin_layout Standard
383 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
385 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
387 Just select the manual you want to read from the
394 \begin_layout Section
395 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
399 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
406 \begin_layout Standard
407 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
408 can be configured via the menu
410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
414 \begin_inset Index idx
417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
424 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
427 packages are available.
428 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
430 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
431 was installed on your system,
432 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
437 \begin_inset space \space{}
440 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
441 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
443 To force \SpecialChar LyX
444 to re-inspect your system use
446 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
450 \begin_inset Index idx
453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
454 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
460 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
461 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
464 \begin_layout Section
467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
469 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
478 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 installed but you will not be
481 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
482 or print your documents
486 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
487 Some \SpecialChar LyX
488 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
497 which can produce PDFs and the like.
500 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
502 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
505 every \SpecialChar LyX
506 document can still be output as plain text
507 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
513 \begin_layout Standard
514 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
520 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
521 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
524 \begin_layout Standard
525 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
527 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
530 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
538 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
539 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
546 \begin_inset Index idx
549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
565 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
569 \begin_layout Chapter
570 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
574 \begin_layout Section
575 Basic File Operations
576 \begin_inset Index idx
579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
588 \begin_layout Standard
593 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
594 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
635 arg "buffer-new-template"
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
675 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
689 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
705 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
715 \begin_layout Itemize
737 \begin_layout Itemize
749 arg "buffer-write-as"
753 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
757 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
775 \begin_layout Itemize
789 \begin_layout Itemize
803 \begin_layout Standard
804 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
805 few minor differences.
808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
819 command lists the available templates.
820 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
821 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
822 and possibly propose text fragments
824 for the document, features
825 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
828 you would otherwise need to
829 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
831 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
835 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
839 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
847 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
853 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
854 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
900 to open a file or create a new one, that big
901 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
905 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
909 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
920 \begin_layout Standard
942 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
944 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
947 people work on the same document at the same time.
951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
952 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
960 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
961 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
963 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
965 \begin_inset Flex Emph
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
971 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
980 \begin_inset Flex Emph
983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
985 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
993 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_inset space ~
1013 will reload the document from disk.
1014 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1015 and want to restore it to the last save
1016 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1028 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1029 them as your changes.
1032 \begin_layout Section
1033 Basic Editing Features
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1046 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1053 \begin_layout Standard
1054 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1055 can perform cut and paste operations
1056 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1057 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1058 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1059 editing features and how to access
1061 We will start with cut and paste.
1064 \begin_layout Standard
1065 As you might expect, the
1069 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1070 various other editing features.
1071 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1075 \begin_layout Itemize
1081 \begin_inset Index idx
1084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1113 \begin_layout Itemize
1119 \begin_inset Index idx
1122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1151 \begin_layout Itemize
1157 \begin_inset Index idx
1160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1185 \begin_layout Itemize
1189 \begin_inset space ~
1195 \begin_layout Itemize
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1205 \begin_layout Itemize
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
1222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1231 \begin_inset Index idx
1234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1249 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1259 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1265 \begin_layout Standard
1266 The first three are self-explanatory.
1267 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1268 and other programs using
1289 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1290 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1295 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1296 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1297 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1298 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1299 into individual cells.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1309 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1313 \begin_layout Standard
1317 \begin_inset space ~
1322 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1324 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1326 \begin_inset space ~
1333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1339 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1340 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1341 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1347 \begin_inset space \space{}
1350 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1351 text which is often meaningless.)
1354 \begin_layout Standard
1358 \begin_inset space ~
1361 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1363 \begin_inset space ~
1367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1380 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1381 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1382 is inserted as one paragraph.
1383 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1387 \begin_inset space ~
1392 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1393 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1399 \begin_inset space ~
1402 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1416 \begin_inset space ~
1419 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1422 paste from the primary selection.
1423 This is normally the currently selected text.
1426 \begin_layout Standard
1429 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1431 \begin_inset space ~
1435 \begin_inset space ~
1443 \begin_inset space ~
1447 \begin_inset space ~
1453 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1459 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1476 button to skip the curren
1477 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1481 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \begin_inset space ~
1493 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1497 \begin_inset space ~
1502 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1504 If the toggle is set, searching for
1505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1516 will not match the word
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 Match whole words only
1533 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1534 to only find complete words, e.
1535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1539 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1568 also offers an advanced
1571 \begin_inset space ~
1575 \begin_inset space ~
1580 feature that is described in section
1581 \begin_inset space ~
1585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1587 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1594 \begin_layout Standard
1595 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1596 \begin_inset space \space{}
1600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1608 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1610 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1615 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1622 \begin_layout Standard
1626 arg "inset-select-all"
1629 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1630 When the cursor is inside an inset
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 selects the content of the inset.
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1644 then to the whole document.
1648 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1651 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1655 \begin_layout Section
1657 \begin_inset Index idx
1660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1667 \begin_inset Index idx
1670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1679 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1686 \begin_layout Standard
1687 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1689 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1695 or the toolbar button
1702 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 or the toolbar button
1714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1721 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1725 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1728 \begin_layout Standard
1729 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1738 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1739 This is a consequence of the 100
1740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1743 step undo limit mentioned above.
1746 \begin_layout Standard
1755 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1757 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1761 \begin_layout Section
1763 \begin_inset Index idx
1766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1776 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1779 \begin_layout Enumerate
1784 \begin_layout Itemize
1789 once anywhere in the edit window.
1790 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1794 \begin_layout Enumerate
1799 \begin_layout Itemize
1806 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1809 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1812 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1813 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1816 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1822 \begin_layout Itemize
1823 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1826 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1833 \begin_layout Enumerate
1834 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1840 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1844 \begin_layout Section
1846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1848 name "sec:Navigating"
1853 \begin_inset Index idx
1856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1865 \begin_layout Standard
1867 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1870 \begin_layout Itemize
1875 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1876 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1880 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1882 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1884 \begin_inset space ~
1889 or by the toolbar button
1892 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1898 \begin_layout Itemize
1899 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1901 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1904 and use the same menu to return to them.
1905 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1908 \begin_layout Standard
1912 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1917 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1918 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1926 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1927 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1928 last editing position.
1931 \begin_layout Standard
1936 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1940 \begin_layout Subsection
1942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1944 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1949 \begin_inset Index idx
1952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 Navigating ! Outline
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1973 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1974 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1975 \begin_inset space ~
1979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1981 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1985 ), notes, or citations (see section
1986 \begin_inset space ~
1990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1992 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1997 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2001 \begin_layout Standard
2002 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2003 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2004 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2005 dialog and to modify the citation.
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2013 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2014 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2016 Labels and References
2018 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2027 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2032 control the display.
2037 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2038 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2043 option keeps it in the current view state.
2044 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2048 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2049 \begin_inset space ~
2052 3, the subsections of sections
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2056 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2061 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2066 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2076 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2079 \begin_layout Standard
2086 button refreshes the TOC (
2087 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2089 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2093 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2095 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2099 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2103 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2107 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2111 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2113 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2117 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2119 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2123 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2125 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2129 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2133 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2135 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2139 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2155 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2167 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2169 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2173 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2187 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2188 For example, you can move section
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2193 \begin_inset space ~
2196 2.4 or after section
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2215 (or the corresponding key bindings
2223 ) you can change the level of sections.
2224 You can make section
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2240 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2241 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2244 \begin_layout Subsection
2245 Horizontal Scrolling
2246 \begin_inset Index idx
2249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2250 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2260 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2262 \begin_inset space ~
2265 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2266 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2267 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2272 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2276 \begin_layout Itemize
2278 is used on a small tablet computer
2281 \begin_layout Itemize
2282 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2307 \begin_layout Itemize
2308 Math constructs with long command names
2311 \begin_layout Standard
2312 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2313 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2315 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2316 window so that table
2317 \begin_inset space ~
2321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2323 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2328 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2330 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2331 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2334 \begin_layout Standard
2335 \begin_inset Float table
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2348 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2352 Horizontal scrolling test.
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_inset Tabular
2363 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2364 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2365 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2366 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2409 \begin_layout Section
2410 Input/Word Completion
2411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2413 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2418 \begin_inset Index idx
2421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2428 \begin_inset Index idx
2431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2462 \begin_layout Standard
2464 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2466 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2467 is used to propose completions.
2470 \begin_layout Standard
2471 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2479 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset space ~
2495 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2505 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2509 \begin_inset space ~
2515 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2516 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2517 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2518 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2523 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2524 completions available.
2529 key to accept a proposed completion.
2530 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2531 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2532 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2535 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2542 \begin_layout Standard
2543 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2544 ing options for text.
2546 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2548 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2550 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2553 he special math option
2557 enables characters to be composed.
2559 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2561 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2565 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2568 you want to insert the character
2569 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2573 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2576 input the characters
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2591 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2595 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2597 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2602 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2604 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2607 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2610 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2612 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2615 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2620 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2622 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2626 's installation folder.
2628 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2629 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2636 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2641 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2642 In the example above,
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2679 \begin_layout Section
2681 \begin_inset Index idx
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2691 \begin_inset Index idx
2694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2723 \begin_inset Index idx
2726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2757 \begin_layout Standard
2758 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2772 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2775 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2779 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2780 \begin_inset space ~
2784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2786 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2797 \begin_inset space ~
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2826 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2830 \begin_layout Labeling
2831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2835 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2836 LatexCommand nomenclature
2838 description "Tabulator key"
2845 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2847 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2854 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2861 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2865 , especially section
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2872 reference "subsec:Lists"
2878 If you are still confused, look in the
2883 \begin_inset Newline newline
2891 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2892 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2896 \begin_layout Labeling
2897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2901 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2902 LatexCommand nomenclature
2904 description "Escape key"
2912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2919 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2920 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2923 \begin_layout Labeling
2924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2929 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2930 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 There are three modifier keys:
2938 \begin_layout Labeling
2939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2957 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2958 LatexCommand nomenclature
2960 description "Control key"
2965 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2966 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2970 \begin_layout Itemize
2979 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2982 \begin_layout Itemize
2991 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2994 \begin_layout Itemize
3003 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3007 \begin_layout Labeling
3008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3026 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3027 LatexCommand nomenclature
3029 description "Shift key"
3034 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3035 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3038 \begin_layout Labeling
3039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3057 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3058 LatexCommand nomenclature
3060 description "Alt or Meta key"
3065 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3066 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3067 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3073 \begin_inset Newline newline
3076 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3078 menu accelerator keys
3081 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3082 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3086 \begin_layout Standard
3087 For example, the sequence
3088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3098 \begin_inset space ~
3104 \begin_inset space ~
3112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3131 \begin_inset space ~
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3152 manual lists all other things bound to the
3160 \begin_layout Standard
3161 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3163 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3165 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3166 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3168 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3169 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3170 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3172 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3188 followed by a capital
3195 \begin_layout Chapter
3198 \begin_inset Index idx
3201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3211 \begin_layout Section
3213 \begin_inset Index idx
3216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 \begin_layout Subsection
3229 \begin_layout Standard
3230 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3231 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3232 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3233 numbering schemes, and so on.
3234 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3235 and format the title of your document differently.
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3243 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3244 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3245 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3246 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3247 picks one for you by default.
3248 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3251 \begin_layout Subsection
3253 \begin_inset Index idx
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3265 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3272 \begin_layout Standard
3273 You can select a class using the
3275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3280 \begin_inset Index idx
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3298 \begin_layout Standard
3299 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3304 \begin_layout Description
3305 Article for basic articles
3308 \begin_layout Description
3309 Report for basic reports
3312 \begin_layout Description
3313 Book for writing a book
3316 \begin_layout Description
3317 Letter for US-style letters
3320 \begin_layout Standard
3321 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3322 only uses if you have installed
3323 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3324 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3325 distributions will include
3327 Here are some of the classes.
3328 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3330 Special Document Classes
3339 \begin_layout Description
3340 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3343 \begin_layout Description
3344 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3353 \begin_layout Description
3354 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3355 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3356 There are three article layouts available.
3357 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3358 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3359 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3360 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3365 sequential numbering
3366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3370 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3371 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3372 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3375 \begin_layout Description
3376 Beamer Layout for presentations
3379 \begin_layout Description
3380 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3381 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3382 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3383 with \SpecialChar LyX
3387 \begin_layout Description
3388 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3391 \begin_layout Description
3393 \begin_inset space ~
3396 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3399 \begin_layout Description
3400 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3403 \begin_layout Description
3404 Foils Used to make transparencies
3407 \begin_layout Description
3408 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3409 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3410 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3411 with \SpecialChar LyX
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3417 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3420 \begin_layout Description
3421 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3428 \begin_layout Description
3429 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3430 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3431 (Is used by this document.)
3434 \begin_layout Description
3435 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3438 \begin_layout Description
3439 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3442 \begin_layout Description
3447 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3448 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3450 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3454 \begin_layout Description
3455 Slides Used to make transparencies
3458 \begin_layout Description
3460 \begin_inset space ~
3463 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3464 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3467 \begin_layout Description
3468 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3471 \begin_layout Standard
3472 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3474 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3476 Special Document Classes
3483 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3484 of the document classes.
3487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3491 \begin_layout Standard
3492 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3497 \begin_inset Index idx
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3517 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3518 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3520 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3523 \begin_layout Standard
3526 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3531 , are highly specialized.
3533 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3534 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3535 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3536 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3537 by some document class.
3538 There are just too many of them.
3539 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3543 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3551 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3552 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3553 document class for a new file.
3555 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3565 manual for information on how to install them.
3566 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3572 \begin_layout Standard
3573 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3574 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3575 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3576 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3577 class files to be used for dissertation
3578 s submitted to those universities.
3579 The \SpecialChar LyX
3580 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3582 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3586 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3592 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3599 name "subsec:Modules"
3604 \begin_inset Index idx
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 \begin_layout Standard
3617 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3618 chosen document class.
3619 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3620 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3631 \begin_inset Index idx
3634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3645 \begin_layout Standard
3646 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3647 packages or file format converters that are not always
3648 installed by default.
3650 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3651 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3652 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3653 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3655 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 file without the missing prerequisites.
3657 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3658 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3665 \begin_inset Index idx
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3669 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3676 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3680 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3684 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3695 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3706 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3709 \begin_layout Standard
3710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3720 will advise you about these things.
3728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3732 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3737 \begin_inset Index idx
3740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3741 Document ! Local Layout
3749 \begin_layout Standard
3750 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3751 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3752 : They are intended to be used in
3753 a variety of different documents.
3754 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3755 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3756 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3757 need a specific inset or
3758 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3760 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3763 style only that one time.
3764 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3766 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3784 manual for information on how to use it.
3787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3791 \begin_layout Standard
3792 Each class has a default set of options.
3793 Here's a quick table describing them:
3796 \begin_layout Standard
3797 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3803 \begin_layout Standard
3805 \begin_inset Tabular
3806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3807 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4273 \begin_layout Standard
4274 You're probably also wondering what
4275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4279 \begin_inset space ~
4283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4287 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4288 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4293 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4298 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4308 headings, there are also
4316 headings, and so on.
4317 We will describe these headings fully in section
4318 \begin_inset space ~
4322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4324 reference "subsec:Headings"
4331 \begin_layout Subsection
4333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4335 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 \begin_inset Index idx
4353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4372 \begin_inset space ~
4380 \begin_inset space ~
4385 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4387 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4388 doesn't support special options you want to
4389 use for your document.
4390 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4391 -class and its options, you have to read
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4397 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4401 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4405 \begin_inset space ~
4412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4418 \begin_inset space ~
4423 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4424 You can choose between the following five options:
4427 \begin_layout Labeling
4428 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4433 Use default page style of current class.
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 No page numbers or headings.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4460 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4461 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4462 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4463 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4466 \begin_layout Labeling
4467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4472 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4473 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4490 How they are defined is explained in section
4491 \begin_inset space ~
4495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4497 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4506 \begin_inset space ~
4510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4512 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4519 \begin_layout Subsection
4520 Paper Size and Orientation
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4525 Document ! Paper size
4531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4533 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4540 \begin_layout Standard
4541 You can find the following options in the menu
4544 \begin_inset space ~
4551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 \begin_layout Labeling
4568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4577 What size paper to print on.
4582 \begin_layout Itemize
4588 \begin_layout Itemize
4594 \begin_layout Itemize
4600 \begin_layout Itemize
4606 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 US letter, US legal, US executive
4612 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 \begin_layout Itemize
4625 \begin_layout Labeling
4626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4631 To choose whether to output as
4642 \begin_layout Labeling
4643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4647 \begin_inset space ~
4652 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4653 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4656 \begin_layout Subsection
4658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4660 name "subsec:Margins"
4665 \begin_inset Index idx
4668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4675 \begin_inset Index idx
4678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 Paper margins are set in the menu
4690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4694 \begin_inset Index idx
4697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4706 \begin_layout Standard
4707 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4708 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4709 the paper format and the font size into account.
4712 \begin_layout Subsection
4716 \begin_layout Standard
4717 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4718 has to convert everything into the new
4720 That includes the paragraph environments.
4721 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4722 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4723 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4725 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4734 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4736 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4737 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4738 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4741 \begin_layout Section
4742 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4743 \begin_inset Index idx
4746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4747 Paragraph ! Indentation
4755 \begin_layout Subsection
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4759 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4768 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4771 \begin_layout Standard
4772 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4773 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4774 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4775 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4779 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4785 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4786 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4787 language than English.
4789 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4793 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4794 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4795 into \SpecialChar LyX
4797 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4800 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4802 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4803 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4804 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4811 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4812 goes to produce a printable file.
4817 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4819 gives you the ability globally to change
4823 these pre-coded spacings.
4824 We will explain more later.
4827 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 Paragraph Separation
4829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4831 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Paragraph ! Separation
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4856 \begin_inset space ~
4864 \begin_inset space ~
4871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4875 \begin_inset Index idx
4878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4884 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4887 \begin_layout Subsection
4891 \begin_layout Standard
4892 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4897 \begin_inset space ~
4902 dialog and toggle the
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4910 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4913 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4917 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4918 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4922 \begin_layout Standard
4923 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4924 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4927 \begin_layout Subsection
4929 \begin_inset Index idx
4932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4941 \begin_layout Standard
4944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4948 \begin_inset Index idx
4951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4960 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4964 \begin_inset space ~
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4980 \begin_inset Index idx
4983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4990 installed to use this feature.
4995 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4999 \begin_inset space ~
5004 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5005 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5008 \begin_layout Section
5009 Paragraph Environments
5010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5012 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5017 \begin_inset Index idx
5020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5021 Paragraph ! Environments
5027 \begin_inset Index idx
5030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5031 Paragraph environments|(
5039 \begin_layout Subsection
5043 \begin_layout Standard
5044 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5056 } \SpecialChar ldots
5066 \begin_inset Newline newline
5069 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5071 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5072 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5073 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5082 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5085 \begin_layout Standard
5086 A paragraph environment is simply a
5087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5094 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5095 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5096 scheme, labels, and so on.
5097 Additionally, you can
5098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5105 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5106 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5107 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5108 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5110 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5112 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5116 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5117 \begin_inset Graphics
5118 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5124 at the left end of the toolbar.
5126 will change the environment of the
5130 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5131 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5132 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5135 \begin_layout Standard
5144 create a new paragraph using the
5148 paragraph environment.
5150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5157 because if you are in one of these environments:
5160 \begin_layout Itemize
5166 \begin_layout Itemize
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5178 \begin_layout Itemize
5184 \begin_layout Itemize
5190 \begin_layout Itemize
5196 \begin_layout Itemize
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5204 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5208 , rather than resetting it to
5213 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5214 \begin_inset space ~
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5220 reference "sec:Nesting"
5227 \begin_layout Subsection
5231 \begin_layout Standard
5232 The default paragraph environment is
5237 It creates a plain paragraph.
5239 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5240 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5241 this manual) are in the
5248 \begin_layout Standard
5249 You can nest a paragraph using the
5253 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5261 \begin_layout Subsection
5263 \begin_inset Index idx
5266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5275 \begin_layout Standard
5276 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5277 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5286 for thanks or contact information.
5287 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5288 places all of this on a separate page
5289 along with today's date.
5290 For other types of documents, the title
5291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5298 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5301 \begin_layout Standard
5303 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5317 Here's how you use them:
5320 \begin_layout Itemize
5321 Put the title of your document in the
5328 \begin_layout Itemize
5329 Put the author name in the
5336 \begin_layout Itemize
5337 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5338 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5344 Note that using this environment is optional.
5345 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5346 will automatically insert today's date.
5347 If you don't want a date, use the option
5349 Suppress default date on front page
5353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5364 \begin_layout Standard
5365 You can use footnotes to insert
5366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 or contact information.
5376 \begin_layout Subsection
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5390 name "subsec:Headings"
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5398 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5400 takes care of the numbering for you.
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5405 \begin_inset Index idx
5408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5409 Section headings ! Numbered
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5418 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5422 \begin_layout Enumerate
5428 \begin_layout Enumerate
5434 \begin_layout Enumerate
5440 \begin_layout Enumerate
5446 \begin_layout Enumerate
5452 \begin_layout Enumerate
5458 \begin_layout Enumerate
5464 \begin_layout Standard
5466 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5467 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5468 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5469 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5471 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5473 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5481 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5482 You group the book into chapters.
5484 does a similar grouping:
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5492 is divided into either
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5515 \begin_layout Itemize
5527 \begin_layout Itemize
5539 \begin_layout Itemize
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 Not all document types use the
5576 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5581 is the top-level heading.
5589 \begin_layout Standard
5594 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5595 labels it with its number,
5596 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5598 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5612 \begin_inset Index idx
5615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 The unnumbered section headings have a
5626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5633 at the end of their name.
5634 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5635 the table of contents, see section
5636 \begin_inset space ~
5640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5650 Changing the Numbering
5651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5653 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5660 \begin_layout Standard
5661 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5662 in the Table of Contents.
5663 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5665 Just as certain classes start with
5679 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5689 This is something you can change.
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5711 \begin_inset space ~
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5720 you will see two counters.
5725 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5726 numbers a section heading.
5727 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5732 Short Titles of Headings
5733 \begin_inset Index idx
5736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5737 Section headings ! Short titles
5743 \begin_inset Argument 1
5746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5755 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5762 \begin_layout Standard
5763 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5764 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5765 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5766 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5769 \begin_layout Standard
5771 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5772 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5773 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5774 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5779 \begin_inset space ~
5785 This will insert a box labeled
5786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5797 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5798 This also works for captions inside floats.
5799 There can only be one short title per title.
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 The following information applies to all section headings:
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5822 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5830 \begin_layout Subsection
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5836 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5850 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5851 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5852 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5853 the text they contain.
5854 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5862 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5866 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5875 when you start a new paragraph.
5876 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5880 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5881 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5882 have to change back to the
5886 environment yourself.
5889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5898 \begin_inset Index idx
5901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5912 time for the differences.
5921 are identical except for one difference:
5925 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5934 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5937 \begin_layout Standard
5938 Here's an example of the
5951 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5953 See – no indentation!
5957 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5958 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5959 the other paragraph.
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5963 Here's another example, this time in the
5970 \begin_layout Quotation
5976 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5977 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5978 the first line, then
5982 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5986 you were quoting other text.
5989 \begin_layout Quotation
5990 Here's a new paragraph.
5991 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5992 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5995 \begin_layout Standard
5996 As the examples show,
6000 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6001 They should put quotes in the
6006 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6010 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6015 \begin_inset Index idx
6018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset Index idx
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6044 \begin_layout Standard
6049 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6055 \begin_inset Newline newline
6058 Which I did not rehearse!
6062 It could be much worse.
6063 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6065 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6066 indented a bit more than the first.
6067 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6073 \begin_inset Newline newline
6076 And make things look fine
6077 \begin_inset Newline newline
6083 arg "newline-insert newline"
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6094 does not indent both margins.
6095 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6096 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6099 arg "newline-insert newline"
6105 \begin_layout Subsection
6107 \begin_inset Index idx
6110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6126 \begin_layout Standard
6128 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6138 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6139 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6148 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6149 lets you provide your own label.
6150 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6151 describing some general features of all four of them.
6154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6158 \begin_layout Standard
6159 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6161 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6162 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6171 reset the environment to
6175 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6176 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6177 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6181 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6185 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6193 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6194 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6195 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6197 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6198 you read all of section
6199 \begin_inset space ~
6203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6205 reference "sec:Nesting"
6212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6214 \begin_inset Index idx
6217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6234 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6238 paragraph environment.
6239 It has the following properties:
6242 \begin_layout Itemize
6243 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6247 \begin_layout Itemize
6249 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6252 \begin_layout Itemize
6253 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6257 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 The items can have any length.
6260 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6261 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6268 \begin_layout Itemize
6273 environment inside another
6277 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6281 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6285 \begin_layout Itemize
6287 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6298 reference "sec:Nesting"
6302 for a full explanation of nesting.
6306 \begin_layout Standard
6307 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6316 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6319 \begin_layout Standard
6320 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6321 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6324 \begin_layout Itemize
6325 The label for the first level
6329 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the second level is a dash.
6338 \begin_layout Itemize
6339 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6343 \begin_layout Itemize
6344 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6348 \begin_layout Itemize
6349 Back out to the third level.
6353 \begin_layout Itemize
6354 Back to the second level.
6358 \begin_layout Itemize
6359 Back to the outermost level.
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6363 These are the default labels for an
6368 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6373 dialog in the submenu
6378 \begin_inset Index idx
6381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6387 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_layout Standard
6392 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6393 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6395 \begin_inset space ~
6399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6401 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6410 \begin_inset Index idx
6413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6422 name "sec:Enumerate"
6429 \begin_layout Standard
6434 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6435 It has these properties:
6438 \begin_layout Enumerate
6439 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6443 \begin_layout Enumerate
6444 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6448 \begin_layout Enumerate
6450 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6453 \begin_layout Enumerate
6458 environment resets the counter to one.
6461 \begin_layout Enumerate
6474 \begin_layout Enumerate
6475 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6476 Items can have any length.
6479 \begin_layout Enumerate
6480 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6487 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6492 \begin_layout Standard
6501 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6503 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6504 labels the four different levels in an
6511 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 The first level of an
6516 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6525 \begin_layout Enumerate
6526 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6530 \begin_layout Enumerate
6531 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6540 \begin_layout Enumerate
6541 Back to the third level
6545 \begin_layout Enumerate
6546 Back to the second level.
6550 \begin_layout Enumerate
6551 Back to the outermost level.
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6555 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6559 environment, see section
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6571 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6576 There is more to nesting
6580 environments than we've stated here.
6581 You should read section
6582 \begin_inset space ~
6586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6588 reference "sec:Nesting"
6592 to learn more about nesting.
6595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6597 \begin_inset Index idx
6600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6609 \begin_layout Standard
6610 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6614 list has no fixed label.
6615 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 of the first line as the label.
6628 \begin_layout Description
6629 Example: This is an example of the
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6638 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6642 \begin_layout Standard
6644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6651 it is meant that the first usage of the
6655 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6657 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6665 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6671 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6673 \begin_inset space ~
6679 \begin_inset space ~
6683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6685 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6689 for more information.) Here is an example:
6692 \begin_layout Description
6694 \begin_inset space ~
6697 Example: This one shows how to use a
6700 \begin_inset space ~
6712 \begin_layout Description
6713 Usage: You should use the
6717 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6718 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6720 It's not a good idea to use a
6724 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6725 You're better off using
6737 paragraphs into them.
6740 \begin_layout Description
6741 Nesting: You can nest
6745 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6749 \begin_layout Standard
6750 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6751 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6752 them from the first line.
6755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6757 \begin_inset Index idx
6760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6769 \begin_layout Standard
6774 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6775 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6788 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6790 Here are its properties:
6793 \begin_layout Labeling
6794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6796 \begin_inset space ~
6799 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6808 of each line as the item label.
6813 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6814 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6815 space as described above.
6818 \begin_layout Labeling
6819 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6820 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6821 uses different margins for the item label and the
6822 body of the item text.
6823 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6824 label width plus a little extra space.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6830 \begin_inset space ~
6833 width \SpecialChar LyX
6834 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6835 If the label width is larger, the label
6836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6843 into the first line.
6844 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6845 margin of the rest of the item text.
6848 \begin_layout Labeling
6849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6851 \begin_inset space ~
6854 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6859 environment has the same left margin.
6860 \begin_inset Newline newline
6863 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6868 \begin_inset space ~
6873 dialog (toolbar button
6876 arg "layout-paragraph"
6883 \begin_inset space ~
6888 determines the default label width.
6889 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6898 multiple times instead.
6899 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6909 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6912 \begin_inset space ~
6917 every time you alter a label in a
6922 \begin_inset Newline newline
6925 The predefined default width is the length of
6926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6934 \begin_inset space ~
6940 \begin_layout Standard
6945 list the same way as the
6949 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6955 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6964 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6965 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6967 \begin_inset space ~
6971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6973 reference "sec:Nesting"
6977 to learn about nesting.
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 There is yet another feature of the
6985 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6986 left-justifies the item labels by
6988 You can use additional
6992 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6993 justifies the item label.
6998 are documented in section
6999 \begin_inset space ~
7003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7005 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7010 Here are some examples:
7013 \begin_layout Labeling
7014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7015 Left The default for
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7031 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7034 \begin_layout Labeling
7035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7036 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7047 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7050 \begin_layout Subsection
7052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7054 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7059 \begin_inset Index idx
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 The features described in this section require that the module
7074 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7076 is loaded in the document settings.
7077 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7083 \begin_inset Index idx
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7097 Custom Enumerate Lists
7098 \begin_inset Index idx
7101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7112 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7118 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7119 There you add the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7144 Code, look at section
7145 \begin_inset space ~
7149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7151 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7164 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7171 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7172 For capital Roman numerals replace
7184 in the command above.
7185 For Arabic numerals use
7193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7200 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 You can only number 26
7226 \begin_inset space ~
7229 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7238 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7239 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7242 \begin_layout Standard
7243 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7246 \begin_layout Enumerate
7247 \begin_inset Argument 1
7250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7276 \begin_layout Enumerate
7277 \begin_inset Argument 1
7280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7308 \begin_layout Enumerate
7309 \begin_inset Argument 1
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7336 \begin_layout Enumerate
7337 \begin_inset Argument 1
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 For this list these commands were used:
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_inset Newline newline
7389 \begin_inset Newline newline
7397 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7414 makes the label emphasized and
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7432 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7433 lists until you change the definition.
7441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7443 \begin_inset Index idx
7446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7455 \begin_layout Standard
7456 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7459 \begin_layout Enumerate
7460 \begin_inset Argument 1
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 \begin_inset Note Note
7485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7486 goes back to default numbering
7494 \begin_layout Enumerate
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7502 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7506 \begin_layout Standard
7507 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7512 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7513 to indicate that it is a resumed
7514 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7515 , but in the output.
7518 \begin_layout Standard
7519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7527 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7536 \begin_layout Standard
7537 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7539 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7540 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7541 of a normal enumeration.
7542 There, insert the command
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7551 \begin_layout Standard
7556 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7560 \begin_layout Enumerate
7564 \begin_layout Enumerate
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7569 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7572 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_inset Argument 1
7576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7592 This enumeration starts at 4
7595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7597 \begin_inset Index idx
7600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7609 \begin_layout Standard
7610 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7612 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7615 \begin_layout Itemize
7619 \begin_layout Itemize
7620 with standard spacing
7623 \begin_layout Standard
7624 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7626 Add there the command
7630 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7633 \begin_layout Itemize
7634 \begin_inset Argument 1
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7656 \begin_layout Itemize
7660 \begin_layout Itemize
7664 \begin_layout Standard
7665 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7672 \begin_inset Index idx
7675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7683 For more information see its documentation,
7684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7695 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7697 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7698 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7702 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7705 \begin_layout Enumerate
7706 \begin_inset Argument 1
7709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 with negative indentation
7734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7735 Further Customization
7736 \begin_inset Index idx
7739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7740 Lists ! Customization
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7749 You can also change the style of description lists.
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7759 \begin_layout Standard
7760 changes the description label font, the command
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7769 \begin_layout Standard
7770 sets the list style.
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 An example where the command
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7782 itshape, style=nextline
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_layout Description
7791 \begin_inset space ~
7795 \begin_inset Argument 1
7798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7806 itshape, style=nextline
7816 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7817 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7821 \begin_layout Description
7823 \begin_inset space ~
7826 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7827 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7828 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7838 \begin_inset Index idx
7841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7849 For more information see its documentation
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7860 \begin_layout Subsection
7862 \begin_inset Index idx
7865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7876 \begin_inset space ~
7879 Address: An Overview
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7883 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7884 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7898 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7899 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7900 gags on the document.
7901 In contrast, you can use the
7908 \begin_inset space ~
7913 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7914 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 Of course, you're not limited to using
7926 \begin_inset space ~
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7940 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7941 some European academic papers.
7944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7948 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7960 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7961 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7970 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7971 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7972 Here's an example of each:
7975 \begin_layout Right Address
7977 \begin_inset Newline newline
7981 \begin_inset Newline newline
7985 \begin_inset Newline newline
7988 When is it? What is today?
7991 \begin_layout Standard
7995 \begin_inset space ~
8001 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8003 the largest block of text on a single line.
8004 Here's an example of the
8011 \begin_layout Address
8013 \begin_inset Newline newline
8016 Where do I send this
8017 \begin_inset Newline newline
8020 Your post office and country
8023 \begin_layout Standard
8024 As you can see, both
8031 \begin_inset space ~
8036 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8041 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8042 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8048 This makes sense, since
8056 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8057 Thus, you have to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8070 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8072 \begin_inset space ~
8076 \begin_inset space ~
8081 ) to start a new line in an
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8096 \begin_layout Subsection
8100 \begin_layout Standard
8101 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8102 or list of references.
8104 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8109 \begin_inset Index idx
8112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8121 \begin_layout Standard
8126 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8127 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8128 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8129 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8133 in anything else or vice versa.
8139 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8140 The book document classes ignores the
8144 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8148 in a letter document class.
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8156 environment does several things for you.
8157 First, it puts the centered label
8158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8166 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8168 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8169 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8170 the subsequent text.
8171 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8173 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8178 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8182 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8183 The new paragraph will still be in the
8188 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8189 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 \begin_inset Float figure
8200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8202 \begin_inset Graphics
8203 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8216 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8237 \begin_layout Standard
8238 We would love to demonstrate the
8242 environment, but since this document is in the
8243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8250 class, we can't do this.
8251 We inserted it therefore as figure
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8258 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8263 If you have never heard of an
8264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8271 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8276 \begin_inset Index idx
8279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8288 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8300 environment is used to list references.
8301 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8302 only use it at the end of the document.
8314 \begin_layout Standard
8315 When you first open a
8319 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8320 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8336 depending on the document class.
8337 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8338 Each paragraph of the
8342 environment is a bibliography entry.
8347 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8348 Each new paragraph is still in the
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8357 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8359 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8361 handling, have a look at section
8362 \begin_inset space ~
8366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8368 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8375 \begin_layout Subsection
8376 Special Environments
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8381 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8382 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8403 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8416 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8418 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8423 key as a fixed whitespace.
8427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8445 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8463 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8466 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8469 arg "newline-insert newline"
8486 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8487 So, when you finish using the
8492 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8493 Also, you can nest the
8498 environment inside of others.
8501 \begin_layout Standard
8502 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 arg "newline-insert newline"
8512 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8517 \begin_inset space \space{}
8527 arg "newline-insert newline"
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 arg "newline-insert newline"
8547 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8555 You must put at least one
8559 in any line you want blank.
8560 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8569 since that will insert
8574 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8577 arg "self-insert \""
8583 \begin_layout Standard
8587 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8591 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8595 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8599 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8603 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 printf("Hello World!
8609 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8617 \begin_layout Standard
8618 This is just the standard
8619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8629 \begin_layout Standard
8635 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8637 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8638 as if you used a typewriter.
8639 \begin_inset Index idx
8642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8643 Paragraph environments|)
8648 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8651 Program Code Listings
8656 \begin_inset space ~
8664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8668 \begin_inset Index idx
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8680 \begin_layout Standard
8685 environment is similar to the
8690 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8691 computer console text.
8696 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8710 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8711 you can have empty lines.
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 have a certain language and a text style
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8730 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8731 and \SpecialChar TeX
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 Because of these properties
8740 works like a typewriter.
8744 \begin_layout Verbatim
8748 \begin_layout Verbatim
8751 The following 2 lines are empty:
8754 \begin_layout Verbatim
8758 \begin_layout Verbatim
8762 \begin_layout Verbatim
8763 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8768 \begin_layout Standard
8773 environment is identical to
8777 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8778 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8785 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8789 \begin_layout Section
8790 Nesting Environments
8791 \begin_inset Index idx
8794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8795 Nesting ! Environments
8801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8810 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 \begin_layout Standard
8816 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8818 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8820 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8822 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8834 \begin_layout Enumerate
8838 \begin_layout Enumerate
8843 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8852 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8857 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8858 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8860 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8862 \begin_inset space ~
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8874 \begin_inset space ~
8878 \begin_inset space ~
8883 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8885 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8888 arg "depth-increment"
8894 arg "depth-decrement"
8908 arg "depth-increment"
8914 arg "depth-decrement"
8918 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8919 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8923 \begin_layout Standard
8924 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8925 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8926 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8927 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8928 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8932 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8934 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8936 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8939 \begin_layout Subsection
8940 What You Can and Can't Nest
8943 \begin_layout Standard
8944 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8945 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8948 \begin_layout Standard
8949 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8950 than a simple yes or no.
8951 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8954 \begin_layout Itemize
8955 Completely unnestable
8958 \begin_layout Itemize
8959 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8963 \begin_layout Itemize
8964 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8968 \begin_layout Standard
8969 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8970 environments have them:
8973 \begin_layout Description
8974 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8975 Can't nest into them.
8979 \begin_layout Itemize
8985 \begin_layout Itemize
8991 \begin_layout Itemize
8997 \begin_layout Itemize
9003 \begin_layout Itemize
9010 \begin_layout Description
9012 \begin_inset space ~
9015 Nestable You can nest them.
9016 You can nest other things into them.
9020 \begin_layout Itemize
9026 \begin_layout Itemize
9032 \begin_layout Itemize
9038 \begin_layout Itemize
9044 \begin_layout Itemize
9050 \begin_layout Itemize
9056 \begin_layout Itemize
9062 \begin_layout Itemize
9069 \begin_layout Itemize
9075 \begin_layout Itemize
9082 \begin_layout Description
9083 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9084 You can't nest anything into them.
9088 \begin_layout Itemize
9094 \begin_layout Itemize
9100 \begin_layout Itemize
9106 \begin_layout Itemize
9112 \begin_layout Itemize
9118 \begin_layout Itemize
9124 \begin_layout Itemize
9130 \begin_layout Itemize
9136 \begin_layout Itemize
9142 \begin_layout Itemize
9148 \begin_layout Itemize
9154 \begin_layout Itemize
9160 \begin_layout Itemize
9166 \begin_layout Itemize
9170 \begin_inset space ~
9176 \begin_layout Itemize
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9192 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9202 \begin_inset space ~
9205 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9206 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9207 nested section headings violate this.
9215 \begin_layout Subsection
9216 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9217 \begin_inset Index idx
9220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9229 \begin_layout Standard
9230 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9231 affected by nesting anyhow.
9235 \begin_layout Itemize
9239 \begin_layout Itemize
9243 \begin_layout Itemize
9247 \begin_layout Standard
9249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9257 Figures and tables in
9261 are not affected by this.
9266 Have a look at section
9267 \begin_inset space ~
9271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9273 reference "sec:Floats"
9277 for more information about
9284 \begin_layout Standard
9286 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9287 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9300 of its own, it behaves just like a
9301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9308 paragraph environment.
9309 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9313 \begin_layout Standard
9314 Here's an example with a table:
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9323 This is (a) and it's nested.
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9334 \begin_layout Standard
9336 \begin_inset Tabular
9337 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9338 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9340 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9424 \begin_layout Standard
9425 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9432 \begin_layout Enumerate
9434 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9438 \begin_layout Enumerate
9442 \begin_layout Standard
9443 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9446 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 \begin_layout Enumerate
9452 This is (a) and it's nested.
9456 \begin_layout Standard
9457 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9463 \begin_layout Standard
9465 \begin_inset Tabular
9466 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9467 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9468 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9469 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9553 \begin_layout Standard
9554 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9560 \begin_layout Enumerate
9567 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9574 \begin_layout Standard
9575 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9579 \begin_layout Standard
9580 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9583 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9586 \begin_layout Enumerate
9591 \begin_layout Enumerate
9592 This is (a) and it's nested.
9595 \begin_layout Standard
9596 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9602 \begin_layout Standard
9604 \begin_inset Tabular
9605 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9606 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9693 \begin_layout Standard
9694 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9700 \begin_layout Enumerate
9702 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 \begin_layout Standard
9714 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9720 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9721 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9725 \begin_layout Subsection
9726 Usage and General Features
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9730 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9731 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9740 is the innermost possible depth.
9741 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9744 \begin_layout Enumerate
9745 level #1 – outermost
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9754 \begin_layout Enumerate
9759 \begin_layout Enumerate
9764 \begin_layout Itemize
9769 \begin_layout Itemize
9778 \begin_layout Standard
9779 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9780 both of them in the example.
9781 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9791 For example, if we tried to nest another
9796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9803 , we would get errors.
9806 \begin_layout Subsection
9808 \begin_inset Index idx
9811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9820 \begin_layout Standard
9821 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9822 We have several examples of nested environments.
9823 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9828 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9831 \begin_layout Labeling
9832 \labelwidthstring MMM
9833 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9842 \begin_layout Labeling
9843 \labelwidthstring MMM
9844 #2-a This is level #2.
9845 We created it by using
9848 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9854 arg "depth-increment"
9861 \begin_layout Labeling
9862 \labelwidthstring MMM
9863 #3-a This is level #3.
9864 This time, we just enter
9871 arg "depth-increment"
9875 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9879 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9885 arg "depth-increment"
9892 \begin_layout Standard
9897 environment, nested inside of
9898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9906 So, it's at level #4.
9907 We did this by entering
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9916 arg "depth-increment"
9919 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9924 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9940 \begin_layout Standard
9945 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9948 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9954 \begin_layout Labeling
9955 \labelwidthstring MMM
9956 #4-a This is level #4.
9960 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9963 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9968 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9972 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9977 keep nesting things inside
9978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9989 \begin_layout Labeling
9990 \labelwidthstring MMM
9991 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9996 \begin_layout Labeling
9997 \labelwidthstring MMM
9998 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9999 and this is level #6.
10000 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10004 \begin_layout Labeling
10005 \labelwidthstring MMM
10006 #5-b Back to level #5.
10010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10016 arg "depth-decrement"
10023 \begin_layout Labeling
10024 \labelwidthstring MMM
10028 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10034 arg "depth-decrement"
10037 , we're back at level #4.
10041 \begin_layout Labeling
10042 \labelwidthstring MMM
10043 #3-b Back to level #3.
10044 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10048 \begin_layout Labeling
10049 \labelwidthstring MMM
10050 #2-b Back to level #2.
10054 \begin_layout Labeling
10055 \labelwidthstring MMM
10056 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10057 After this sentence, we will enter
10061 and change the paragraph environment back to
10068 \begin_layout Standard
10069 We could have also used the
10085 environment in place of the
10090 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10094 Example 2: Inheritance
10097 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10098 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10101 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10117 which, we will change to the
10125 \begin_layout Enumerate
10130 environment, at level #2.
10133 \begin_layout Enumerate
10134 Notice how the nested
10138 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10142 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10147 We ended this example by entering
10152 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10156 and reset the nesting depth by using
10159 arg "depth-decrement"
10165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10166 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10175 \begin_inset Argument 1
10178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10179 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10187 \begin_layout Enumerate
10188 This is level #1, in an
10192 paragraph environment.
10193 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10197 \begin_layout Enumerate
10202 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10208 arg "depth-increment"
10212 Now, what happens if we nest an
10216 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10217 label be? An asterisk?
10221 \begin_layout Itemize
10231 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10232 So, its label is a bullet.
10233 (We got here by using
10236 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10242 arg "depth-increment"
10245 , then changing the environment to
10253 \begin_layout Itemize
10254 Here's level #4, produced using
10257 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10263 arg "depth-increment"
10267 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10272 \begin_layout Enumerate
10274 to get to level #5.
10275 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10280 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10284 , because we are in the
10292 environment (that is, it is an
10307 \begin_layout Enumerate
10312 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10313 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10317 \begin_layout Enumerate
10318 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10327 \begin_layout Enumerate
10331 arg "depth-decrement"
10334 to decrease the depth after the next
10337 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10344 \begin_layout Enumerate
10346 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10351 \begin_layout Enumerate
10353 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10354 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10358 \begin_layout Enumerate
10359 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10368 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10373 reset the counter for the label.
10377 \begin_layout Enumerate
10381 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10387 arg "depth-decrement"
10390 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10391 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10392 into the twofold-nested
10400 \begin_layout Enumerate
10401 The same thing happens if we do another
10404 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10410 arg "depth-decrement"
10413 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10416 \begin_layout Standard
10417 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10422 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10433 The number of other
10437 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10444 The same rule applies for the
10448 environment, as well.
10451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10452 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10455 \begin_layout Enumerate
10456 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10457 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10458 the same detail with how we did it.
10467 \begin_layout Standard
10475 arg "depth-increment"
10482 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10483 the example in parentheses someplace.
10484 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10485 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10486 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10499 \begin_layout Verse
10500 Now we will add verse.
10501 \begin_inset Newline newline
10504 It will get much worse.
10505 \begin_inset Newline newline
10515 arg "depth-increment"
10525 \begin_layout Verse
10526 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10527 \begin_inset Newline newline
10530 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10531 \begin_inset Newline newline
10537 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10545 \begin_layout Verse
10546 Here comes a table:
10550 \begin_layout Standard
10551 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10557 \begin_layout Standard
10559 \begin_inset Tabular
10560 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10561 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10648 \begin_layout Verse
10652 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10662 arg "depth-increment"
10668 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10674 \begin_inset Newline newline
10682 arg "depth-decrement"
10689 \begin_layout Enumerate
10694 : level #1) This is another item.
10695 Note that selecting a
10699 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10700 3 times to put the table inside the
10707 \begin_layout Quotation
10708 We're now ending the
10712 list and changing to
10717 We're still at level #1.
10718 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10719 The next set of paragraphs is a
10720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10727 We will nest both the
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10739 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10743 for the letter body.
10747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10750 to preserve the depth.
10751 Remember that you need to use
10754 arg "newline-insert newline"
10757 to create multiple lines inside the
10764 \begin_inset space ~
10774 \begin_layout Right Address
10776 \begin_inset Newline newline
10779 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10780 \begin_inset Newline newline
10786 \begin_layout Address
10788 \begin_inset space ~
10794 \begin_layout Quotation
10795 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10799 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10800 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10801 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10802 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10803 as soon as possible.
10804 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10807 \begin_layout Quotation
10808 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10809 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10810 with your order, along with payment.
10813 \begin_layout Quotation
10814 We thank you again for your patience.
10817 \begin_layout Address
10819 \begin_inset Newline newline
10826 \begin_layout Quotation
10827 That ends that example!
10830 \begin_layout Standard
10831 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10832 gives you a lot of power with just
10834 We could have easily nested an
10855 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10858 \begin_layout Subsection
10860 \begin_inset Index idx
10863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10864 Nesting ! Separation
10870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10872 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10879 \begin_layout Standard
10880 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10882 For example you need two different enumerations:
10885 \begin_layout Enumerate
10890 \begin_layout Enumerate
10895 \begin_layout Enumerate
10899 \begin_layout Standard
10900 \begin_inset Separator plain
10906 \begin_layout Itemize
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10913 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10919 \begin_layout Enumerate
10923 \begin_layout Enumerate
10927 \begin_layout Enumerate
10931 \begin_layout Standard
10932 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10933 list item and use the menu
10935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10936 Separated <Name> Above
10940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10941 Separated <Name> Below
10944 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10945 ) and before or behind it the
10947 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10950 \begin_layout Standard
10951 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10952 (red arrow in LyX).
10953 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10954 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10957 \begin_layout Standard
10958 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10961 arg "paragraph-break"
10968 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10971 \begin_layout Section
10972 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10973 \begin_inset Index idx
10976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10985 \begin_layout Standard
10986 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10987 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10989 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10990 be broken at the end of a line.
10991 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10995 \begin_layout Subsection
10997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10999 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11004 \begin_inset Index idx
11007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11016 \begin_layout Standard
11017 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11018 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11019 ) not to break the line at
11021 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11024 \begin_layout Quote
11025 Further documentation is given in section
11026 \begin_inset Newline newline
11030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11032 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11039 \begin_layout Standard
11040 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11055 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11064 A protected space is set with
11066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11067 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11069 \begin_inset space ~
11077 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11083 \begin_layout Subsection
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11087 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11092 \begin_inset Index idx
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 Spacing ! Horizontal
11104 \begin_layout Standard
11105 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11108 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11112 The length units are listed in Appendix
11113 \begin_inset space ~
11117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11119 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11130 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11135 \begin_inset Index idx
11138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11139 Spaces ! Inter-word
11147 \begin_layout Standard
11148 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11149 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11150 at the ends of sentences.
11151 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11152 automatically takes care about this.
11153 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11154 followed by a period; see section
11155 \begin_inset space ~
11159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11161 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11166 To insert a normal space, select
11168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11169 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11171 \begin_inset space ~
11179 arg "space-insert normal"
11185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11189 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11194 \begin_inset Index idx
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 \begin_layout Standard
11208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11215 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11224 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11225 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11226 inside abbreviations:
11229 \begin_layout Quote
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11239 or between values and units.
11240 Compare for example this:
11241 \begin_inset Newline newline
11245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 \begin_inset Newline newline
11252 10 kg (normal space
11255 \begin_layout Standard
11256 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11259 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11261 \begin_inset space ~
11269 arg "space-insert thin"
11275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11279 \begin_layout Standard
11280 You can also insert the following space types:
11283 \begin_layout Description
11285 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11287 \begin_inset space ~
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11297 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11301 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11305 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11307 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11310 space between the arrows.
11311 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11315 \begin_layout Description
11317 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11319 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11323 \begin_inset space ~
11326 space A line with a
11327 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11331 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11335 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11339 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11341 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11344 space between the arrows.
11347 \begin_layout Description
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11353 \begin_inset space ~
11356 space A line with a
11357 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11361 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11365 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11368 negative thin space between the arrows.
11371 \begin_layout Description
11373 \begin_inset space ~
11377 \begin_inset space ~
11380 space A line with a
11381 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11385 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11389 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11392 negative medium space between the arrows.
11395 \begin_layout Description
11397 \begin_inset space ~
11401 \begin_inset space ~
11404 space A line with a
11405 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11409 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11413 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11416 negative thick space between the arrows.
11419 \begin_layout Description
11421 \begin_inset space ~
11425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11429 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11433 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11437 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11441 \begin_inset space ~
11445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11448 em) space between the arrows.
11451 \begin_layout Description
11453 \begin_inset space ~
11457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11461 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11465 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11469 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11473 \begin_inset space ~
11477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11480 em) space between the arrows.
11483 \begin_layout Description
11485 \begin_inset space ~
11489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11493 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11497 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11501 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11512 em) space between the arrows.
11515 \begin_layout Description
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11525 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11530 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11537 cm space between the arrows.
11540 \begin_layout Standard
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11548 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11552 lists the different space sizes.
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11556 \begin_inset Float table
11563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11564 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11569 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11573 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 \begin_inset Tabular
11584 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11585 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11586 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11587 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11684 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11690 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11701 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11712 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11718 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11729 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11759 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11918 \begin_inset Index idx
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11931 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11932 feature for adding extra space
11933 in a uniform fashion.
11934 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11935 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11936 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11937 equally between themselves.
11940 \begin_layout Standard
11941 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11944 \begin_layout Quote
11946 This is on the left side
11947 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11950 This is on the right
11953 \begin_layout Quote
11956 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11966 \begin_layout Quote
11969 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11977 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11983 \begin_layout Standard
11984 That was an example in the
11990 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11994 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11998 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12001 is one in a standard paragraph.
12002 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12006 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12009 \begin_layout Standard
12010 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12013 \begin_inset space ~
12018 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12021 \begin_layout Standard
12023 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12027 \begin_inset space ~
12033 \begin_layout Standard
12035 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12039 \begin_inset space ~
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12047 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12051 \begin_inset space ~
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12063 \begin_inset space ~
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12071 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12073 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12077 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12078 (= opened downwards)
12081 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12085 \begin_inset space ~
12091 \begin_layout Standard
12093 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12095 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12099 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12103 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12107 \begin_inset space ~
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12122 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12126 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12128 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12129 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12133 option in the space dialog.
12141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12145 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12150 \begin_inset Index idx
12153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12162 \begin_layout Standard
12163 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12164 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12167 \begin_layout Standard
12168 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12171 What is correct English?:
12172 \begin_inset Newline newline
12176 \begin_inset Newline newline
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12183 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12184 \begin_inset Newline newline
12188 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12199 \begin_inset Newline newline
12203 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12214 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12220 \begin_layout Standard
12222 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12227 \begin_inset space ~
12231 \begin_inset space ~
12235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12239 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12242 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12263 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12272 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12273 That is why it is named
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12282 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12283 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12287 \begin_layout Subsection
12289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12291 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12296 \begin_inset Index idx
12299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12308 \begin_layout Standard
12309 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12312 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12314 \begin_inset space ~
12320 There you find the following sizes:
12323 \begin_layout Standard
12336 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12337 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12342 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 \begin_inset space ~
12353 \begin_inset Index idx
12356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 Document ! Settings
12362 for the paragraph separation.
12363 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12372 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12376 \begin_layout Standard
12378 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12387 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12388 size including line spacing.
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12399 \begin_inset Index idx
12402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12408 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12409 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12414 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12415 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12424 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12433 s are described in section
12434 \begin_inset space ~
12438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12440 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12449 If there are several
12453 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12454 You can therefore use
12458 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12461 \begin_layout Standard
12466 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12467 \begin_inset space ~
12471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12473 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12481 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12491 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12492 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12504 \begin_layout Subsection
12505 Paragraph Alignment
12506 \begin_inset Index idx
12509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12510 Paragraph ! Alignment
12518 \begin_layout Standard
12519 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12521 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12524 dialog (toolbar button
12527 arg "layout-paragraph"
12531 There are five possibilities:
12534 \begin_layout Itemize
12542 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12548 \begin_layout Itemize
12556 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12562 \begin_layout Itemize
12570 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12576 \begin_layout Itemize
12584 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12590 \begin_layout Itemize
12598 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12606 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12607 the left and right margins.
12608 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12613 This paragraph is right aligned,
12616 \begin_layout Standard
12618 this one is centered,
12621 \begin_layout Standard
12623 this one is left aligned.
12626 \begin_layout Subsection
12628 \begin_inset Index idx
12631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12632 Page breaks ! Forced
12638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12640 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12647 \begin_layout Standard
12648 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12650 force a page break where you want one.
12651 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 is good at page breaking.
12653 Only if you use a lot of
12657 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12661 \begin_layout Standard
12662 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12663 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12667 have to change the page breaking.
12670 \begin_layout Standard
12671 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12673 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12684 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12687 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12689 \begin_inset space ~
12694 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12696 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12697 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12700 \begin_layout Standard
12701 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12702 at the top of a page.
12703 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12705 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12706 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12707 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12711 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12715 to learn more about
12722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12726 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12731 \begin_inset Index idx
12734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 Page breaks ! Clear
12743 \begin_layout Standard
12744 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12745 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12746 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12747 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12748 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12752 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12757 \begin_inset space ~
12763 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 \begin_inset space ~
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12777 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12778 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12781 \begin_layout Subsection
12783 \begin_inset Index idx
12786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12795 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12802 \begin_layout Standard
12803 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12805 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12808 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12822 arg "newline-insert newline"
12826 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12829 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12835 \begin_inset space ~
12843 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12846 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12848 This is useful to avoid
12849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12856 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12859 \begin_layout Standard
12860 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12861 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12863 very good at line breaking.
12864 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12865 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12866 \begin_inset space ~
12870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12872 reference "sec:Quote"
12877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12879 reference "sec:Verse"
12884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12886 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12893 \begin_layout Subsection
12895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12897 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12902 \begin_inset Index idx
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 \begin_layout Standard
12916 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12927 \begin_layout Standard
12931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12939 you can insert horizontal lines.
12940 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12941 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12942 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12945 \begin_layout Standard
12947 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12958 \begin_layout Section
12959 Characters and Symbols
12962 \begin_layout Standard
12963 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12964 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12965 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12973 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12977 for information on how this is done.
12980 \begin_layout Standard
12981 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12986 dialog via the menu
12988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12989 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12995 \begin_layout Standard
12996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13004 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13005 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13007 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13015 \begin_layout Section
13016 Fonts and Text Styles
13017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13019 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13026 \begin_layout Subsection
13028 \begin_inset Index idx
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13040 \begin_layout Standard
13041 There are two types of fonts:
13044 \begin_layout Description
13046 \begin_inset space ~
13050 \begin_inset Index idx
13053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13059 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13064 characters) in the font.
13065 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13066 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13067 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13068 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13069 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13070 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13071 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13072 \begin_inset Newline newline
13075 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13076 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13077 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13078 sizes than at small ones.
13079 \begin_inset Newline newline
13093 \begin_inset space ~
13101 \begin_layout Description
13103 \begin_inset space ~
13107 \begin_inset Index idx
13110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13116 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13117 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13118 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13119 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13120 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13121 image manipulation program.
13122 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13123 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13127 pixels high up to 34
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13131 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13132 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13133 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13135 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13136 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13137 \begin_inset Newline newline
13140 Bitmap fonts are named
13143 \begin_inset space ~
13148 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13151 \begin_layout Standard
13152 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13153 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13154 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13155 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13156 use scalable fonts.
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13160 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13168 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13171 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13172 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13173 font to emphasize text, you use an
13174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13182 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13184 In \SpecialChar LyX
13185 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13189 \begin_layout Subsection
13192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13194 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13201 \begin_layout Standard
13202 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13203 used its own fonts.
13204 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13205 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13208 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13209 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13210 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13211 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13212 to a word processor.
13213 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13214 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13215 files are very portable across
13216 different machines.
13217 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13218 has increased a lot
13219 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13222 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13230 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13235 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13236 code in the document
13237 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13240 \begin_layout Standard
13241 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13242 engines that are also able directly
13243 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13245 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13247 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13249 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13250 that is installed on your system.
13251 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13254 \begin_layout Standard
13255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13263 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13264 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13272 \begin_layout Subsection
13273 Document Font and Font size
13274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13276 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13281 \begin_inset Index idx
13284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13291 \begin_inset Index idx
13294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13303 \begin_layout Standard
13304 You can set the document fonts in the
13306 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13310 \begin_inset Index idx
13313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13314 Document ! Settings
13324 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13325 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13337 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13339 \begin_inset space ~
13342 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13345 \begin_layout Standard
13350 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13351 This requires that you use
13363 as the output format, i.
13364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13368 \begin_inset space \space{}
13371 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13372 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13373 installed (see section
13374 \begin_inset space ~
13378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13380 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13385 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13387 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13388 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13390 \begin_inset space ~
13393 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13394 cannot determine the family.
13395 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13396 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13399 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13402 \begin_layout Standard
13403 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13404 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13409 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13415 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13417 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13419 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13422 font encoding, this is
13423 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13424 , depending on the document language,
13427 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13428 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13436 \begin_inset space ~
13442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13452 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13453 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13475 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13496 European Computer Modern
13499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13507 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13515 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13516 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13521 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13524 \begin_inset space ~
13529 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13535 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13536 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13539 \begin_layout Itemize
13543 \begin_inset space ~
13548 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13561 \begin_inset space ~
13566 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13567 community in order to replace
13571 as the default font.
13572 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13573 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13576 \begin_inset space ~
13589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 One difference is improved kerning.
13598 \begin_layout Itemize
13599 If you do not like the look of
13607 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13612 \begin_inset space ~
13618 \begin_inset space ~
13628 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13629 \begin_inset space ~
13632 serif and typewriter fonts,
13636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13637 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13644 \begin_inset space ~
13653 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13658 \begin_inset space \space{}
13666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13670 \begin_inset space \space{}
13676 \begin_inset space ~
13684 \begin_inset space ~
13694 but you can also select your own.
13695 \begin_inset Newline newline
13698 The differences between roman,
13701 \begin_inset space ~
13710 fonts are explained in section
13711 \begin_inset space ~
13715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13717 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13722 \begin_inset Newline newline
13728 \begin_inset space ~
13733 was originally designed for newspapers.
13734 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13735 into the small newspaper columns.
13739 \begin_inset space ~
13744 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13747 \begin_layout Standard
13748 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13761 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13766 depends on the class you are using.
13767 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13770 \begin_layout Standard
13771 Note that the font size is the
13776 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13777 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13778 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13779 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13782 \begin_inset space ~
13788 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13789 \begin_inset space ~
13793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13795 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13802 \begin_layout Standard
13806 \begin_inset space ~
13811 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13816 serif or typewriter.
13821 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13831 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13834 \begin_layout Standard
13839 LaTeX font encoding
13841 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13842 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13848 \begin_inset Index idx
13851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13859 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13861 \begin_inset space ~
13865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13867 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13874 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13875 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13876 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13880 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13888 \begin_layout Standard
13889 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13891 Use Old Style Figures
13895 Use True Small Caps
13898 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13901 Use Old Style Figures
13903 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13905 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13913 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13917 Use True Small Caps
13919 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13920 of scaled capitals.
13921 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13922 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13923 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13927 \begin_layout Standard
13929 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13930 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13931 provided by the font package (or the
13935 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13940 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13946 \begin_layout Standard
13951 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13952 a font to display the script characters.
13956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13957 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13963 \begin_inset Index idx
13966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13973 So this has no effect for the document language
13989 \begin_layout Standard
13992 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13994 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13995 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14001 \begin_inset Index idx
14004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14006 packages ! microtype
14015 \begin_layout Standard
14018 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14020 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14025 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14026 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14032 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14033 \begin_inset space ~
14037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14039 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14050 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14054 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14062 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14067 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14068 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14070 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14072 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14075 dialog, see section
14076 \begin_inset space ~
14080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14082 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14094 \begin_layout Subsection
14098 \begin_layout Standard
14099 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14100 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14102 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14103 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14104 choose a math font in the dialog
14106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14110 \begin_inset Index idx
14113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14114 Document ! Settings
14120 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14121 automatically selects a math font.
14122 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14123 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14132 \begin_inset space ~
14138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14143 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14144 document font is available.
14147 \begin_layout Standard
14148 Note that the math font will not be used for
14152 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14158 or by the insertion of the command
14165 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14166 \begin_inset space ~
14170 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14171 while the math characters do not.
14173 \begin_inset space ~
14176 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14179 \begin_inset space ~
14187 \begin_inset space ~
14192 in the document font settings.
14195 \begin_layout Standard
14196 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14197 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14198 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14199 font (in most cases
14200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14206 \begin_inset space ~
14212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14215 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14216 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14236 \begin_layout Subsection
14238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14240 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14248 name "subsec:charstyles"
14255 \begin_inset Index idx
14258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14265 \begin_inset Index idx
14268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14277 \begin_layout Standard
14278 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14279 automatically changes the
14280 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14283 style for certain paragraph environments.
14285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14286 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14288 This is where we meet the concept of
14294 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14296 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14300 \begin_layout Standard
14302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14307 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14331 e., available with all document classes.
14332 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14336 for specific purposes.
14337 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14340 \begin_layout Standard
14342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14343 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14353 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14357 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14370 — you customized the
14375 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14376 among them, encourage the use of
14388 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14389 \begin_inset space ~
14393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14395 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14400 Rather than fiddling with
14404 , they encourage the use of
14408 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14413 \begin_inset Quotes els
14417 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14420 ), not their form (
14421 \begin_inset Quotes els
14425 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14429 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14430 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14431 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14432 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14433 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14434 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14440 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14444 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14445 With a semantic markup (such as
14449 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14454 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14456 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14457 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14460 \begin_layout Standard
14462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14463 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14464 by \SpecialChar LyX
14470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14472 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14473 Builtin Text Styles
14474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14476 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14483 \begin_layout Standard
14485 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14486 The two builtin text styles can be
14487 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14495 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14496 both of these styles
14499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14507 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14513 \begin_layout Standard
14518 style, do one of the following:
14521 \begin_layout Itemize
14522 click on the toolbar button
14531 \begin_layout Itemize
14532 use the key binding
14539 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14543 \begin_layout Itemize
14545 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14553 arg "dialog-show character"
14559 arg "dialog-show character"
14562 ) as described in section
14563 \begin_inset space ~
14567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14569 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14578 \begin_layout Standard
14579 These commands are all toggles.
14584 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14587 \begin_layout Standard
14588 One typically uses the
14592 style for proper names.
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14611 \begin_layout Standard
14613 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14618 is producing text in
14622 , but the definition can be changed.
14627 \begin_layout Standard
14629 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14631 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14639 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14646 \begin_layout Itemize
14647 clicking on the toolbar button
14656 \begin_layout Itemize
14657 using the keybindings
14664 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14668 \begin_layout Itemize
14670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14678 arg "dialog-show character"
14684 arg "dialog-show character"
14687 ) as described in section
14688 \begin_inset space ~
14692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14694 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14708 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14712 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14715 packages use a different font
14716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14717 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14723 \begin_layout Standard
14724 We've been using the
14728 style all over the place in this document.
14729 Here's one more example:
14732 \begin_layout Quotation
14736 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14738 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14744 \begin_layout Standard
14745 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14746 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14747 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14748 the common tendency to overuse
14749 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14751 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14756 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14758 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14762 \begin_layout Standard
14764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14765 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14766 only as font changes and integrated in the
14774 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14777 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14784 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14790 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14795 \begin_inset space ~
14798 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14806 arg "dialog-show character"
14812 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14820 arg "dialog-show character"
14824 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14834 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14841 \begin_layout Standard
14843 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14844 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14846 \begin_inset space ~
14850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14852 reference "subsec:Modules"
14859 ), or local layout settings (see section
14860 \begin_inset space ~
14864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14866 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14871 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14875 markup for specific functions.
14876 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14881 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14891 \begin_inset Quotes els
14895 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14901 \begin_layout Standard
14903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14904 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14906 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14912 \begin_layout Standard
14914 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14915 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14920 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14921 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14922 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14927 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14928 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14941 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14942 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14943 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14944 \begin_inset Flex Code
14947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14958 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14963 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14972 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14986 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14987 on screen their formal appearance.
14992 \begin_layout Subsection
14994 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14996 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15006 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15014 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15016 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15022 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15027 \begin_inset Index idx
15030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15039 \begin_layout Standard
15040 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15044 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15046 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15053 the properties of text passages
15054 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15058 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15059 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15060 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15061 from ordinary dialog.
15062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15066 \begin_layout Standard
15068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15069 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15070 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15071 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15072 the properties of the respective text passages.
15077 comes in as a last resort.
15082 \begin_layout Standard
15083 Before we document how to
15084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15085 use custom character style
15086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15087 tweak the text properties
15089 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15090 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15096 \begin_inset Newline newline
15099 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15100 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15103 \begin_layout Standard
15105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15106 use custom character styles
15107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15108 tweak text properties
15111 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15116 \begin_inset space ~
15119 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15127 arg "dialog-show character"
15132 dialog or press the toolbar button
15135 arg "dialog-show character"
15140 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15143 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15144 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15146 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15149 property that you can choose.
15150 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15153 \begin_inset space ~
15158 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15160 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15171 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15172 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15173 environments all at once.
15176 \begin_layout Standard
15178 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15180 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15183 properties, and their options (in addition to
15186 \begin_inset space ~
15192 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15204 \begin_layout Labeling
15205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15219 The possible options are:
15223 \begin_layout Labeling
15224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15229 This is the Roman font family.
15230 Normally a serif font.
15231 It's also the default family.
15241 \begin_layout Labeling
15242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15246 \begin_inset space ~
15253 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15265 \begin_layout Labeling
15266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15273 This is the Typewriter font family.
15279 arg "font-typewriter"
15285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15292 The general differences of these families are:
15295 \begin_layout Itemize
15297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15302 fonts use characters with serifs.
15303 These are the small
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15311 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15312 The following example shows the difference:
15313 \begin_inset Newline newline
15317 \begin_inset Newline newline
15322 text without serifs
15325 \begin_inset Newline newline
15328 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15329 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15336 \begin_layout Itemize
15338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15343 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15344 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15345 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15348 \begin_layout Itemize
15350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15363 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15381 \begin_inset Newline newline
15385 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15403 \begin_inset Note Note
15406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15408 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15409 For more on phantoms see section
15410 \begin_inset space ~
15414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15416 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15426 \begin_inset Newline newline
15435 \begin_layout Labeling
15436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15441 This corresponds to the print weight.
15446 \begin_layout Labeling
15447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15452 This is the Medium font series.
15453 It's also the default series.
15456 \begin_layout Labeling
15457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15464 This is the Bold font series.
15477 \begin_layout Labeling
15478 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15483 As the name implies.
15488 \begin_layout Labeling
15489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15494 This is the Upright font shape.
15495 It's also the default shape.
15498 \begin_layout Labeling
15499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15519 s the Italic font shape
15525 \begin_layout Labeling
15526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15533 This is the Slanted font shape
15535 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15536 , this is different from italic).
15539 \begin_layout Labeling
15540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15544 \begin_inset space ~
15551 This is the Small caps font shape
15558 \begin_layout Labeling
15559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15564 Alters the text color.
15565 Note that not all DVI
15566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15568 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15571 viewers are able to display colors.
15573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15577 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15579 \begin_inset space ~
15586 , which means that the document default color set in
15588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15595 \begin_inset space ~
15601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15607 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15687 \begin_inset Index idx
15690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15697 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15703 \begin_layout Labeling
15704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15709 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15710 the language of the document.
15711 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15713 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15716 in blue to indicate the change
15717 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15718 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15722 \begin_inset Newline newline
15725 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15727 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15728 When using the spell checking (see section
15729 \begin_inset space ~
15733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15735 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15739 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15742 \begin_inset Newline newline
15745 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15747 Exclude from Spellchecking
15750 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15753 \begin_layout Labeling
15754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15759 Alters the size of the font.
15761 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15763 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15770 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15771 document font size.
15772 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15773 the details, but a general description of what
15779 \begin_layout Labeling
15780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15801 arg "font-size tiny"
15807 \begin_layout Labeling
15808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15829 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15835 \begin_layout Labeling
15836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15857 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15863 \begin_layout Labeling
15864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15885 arg "font-size small"
15891 \begin_layout Labeling
15892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15906 It's also the default size.
15910 arg "font-size normal"
15916 \begin_layout Labeling
15917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15938 arg "font-size large"
15944 \begin_layout Labeling
15945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15966 arg "font-size larger"
15972 \begin_layout Labeling
15973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15994 arg "font-size largest"
16000 \begin_layout Labeling
16001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16022 arg "font-size huge"
16028 \begin_layout Labeling
16029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16050 arg "font-size giant"
16056 \begin_layout Labeling
16057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16062 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16082 arg "font-size increase"
16088 \begin_layout Labeling
16089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16094 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16114 arg "font-size decrease"
16121 \begin_layout Standard
16126 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16127 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16129 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16130 — use those instead.
16131 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16134 \begin_layout Labeling
16135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16137 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16147 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16148 change a few other things at the character level
16149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16150 have text passages being underlined
16154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16155 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16156 days, when you could not change fonts.
16157 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16158 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16159 because some people
16163 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16170 \begin_layout Labeling
16171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16173 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16180 This is text with emphasize on
16183 This might seem like the same as
16187 , but it is actually a bit different.
16193 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16195 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16200 \begin_layout Labeling
16201 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16203 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16208 Don't use underlining.
16213 \begin_layout Labeling
16214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16228 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16230 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16239 arg "font-underline"
16245 \begin_inset Newline newline
16249 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16252 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16253 when you could not change fonts.
16254 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16255 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16256 because some people
16260 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16265 \begin_layout Labeling
16266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16270 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16272 \begin_inset space ~
16281 This is text with Double under
16282 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16293 arg "font-underunderline"
16297 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16299 \begin_inset Newline newline
16302 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16303 about double underbar
16308 \begin_layout Labeling
16309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16313 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16315 \begin_inset space ~
16324 This is text with Wavy under
16325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16336 arg "font-underwave"
16340 \begin_inset Newline newline
16343 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16344 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16350 \begin_layout Labeling
16351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16358 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16364 \begin_layout Labeling
16365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16372 Don't use strikethrough.
16375 \begin_layout Labeling
16376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16380 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16382 \begin_inset space ~
16386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16394 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16396 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16397 Single strikethrough
16405 arg "font-strikeout"
16409 \begin_inset Newline newline
16412 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16413 changed in the meantime.
16416 \begin_layout Labeling
16417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16419 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16423 \begin_inset space ~
16427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16429 \begin_inset space ~
16433 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16449 \begin_inset Newline newline
16452 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16456 \begin_layout Standard
16458 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16459 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16460 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16461 \begin_inset space ~
16465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16467 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16474 \begin_layout Itemize
16476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16483 This is text with emphasize on
16488 \begin_layout Itemize
16492 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16499 This is text with Noun on.
16501 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16508 , this is a logical attribute.
16509 Normally it's equivalent to
16512 \begin_inset space ~
16522 \begin_layout Standard
16523 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16524 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16526 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16532 chosen a new character style
16533 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16534 applied a text property
16537 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16540 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16542 \begin_inset space ~
16545 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16553 arg "dialog-show character"
16561 arg "dialog-show character"
16564 ) dialog, the settings are
16565 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16569 You can activate the
16570 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16573 last applied properties
16575 by using the toolbar button
16578 arg "textstyle-apply"
16582 The button lets you apply
16583 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16584 your custom character style
16585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16588 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16590 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16591 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16592 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16593 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 To completely reset the
16600 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16602 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16603 text properties of a selection
16605 to the default, use
16606 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16608 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16618 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16623 from the menu of the toolbar button
16626 arg "textstyle-apply"
16633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16634 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16635 you just set the shape to
16636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16654 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_layout Standard
16670 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16671 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16679 \begin_inset space ~
16691 \begin_layout Itemize
16693 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16706 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16724 \begin_inset Newline newline
16728 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16742 \begin_inset Note Note
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 For more on phantoms see section
16747 \begin_inset space ~
16751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16753 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16763 \begin_inset Newline newline
16769 \begin_layout Itemize
16771 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16776 fonts use characters with serifs.
16777 These are the small
16778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16785 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16786 The following example shows the difference:
16787 \begin_inset Newline newline
16791 \begin_inset Newline newline
16796 text without serifs
16799 \begin_inset Newline newline
16802 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16803 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16810 \begin_layout Itemize
16812 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16817 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16818 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16819 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16824 \begin_layout Standard
16826 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16834 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16835 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16843 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16844 the property to be removed.
16845 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16846 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16847 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16865 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16866 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16874 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16878 \begin_inset space ~
16883 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16894 If you, for example, set
16895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16913 \begin_inset space ~
16918 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16927 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16932 \begin_layout Standard
16934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16937 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16938 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16941 \begin_layout Section
16942 Printing and Previewing
16945 \begin_layout Subsection
16949 \begin_layout Standard
16950 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16951 using \SpecialChar LyX
16952 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16953 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16954 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16955 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16957 Additional Features
16962 \begin_layout Standard
16964 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16967 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16968 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16969 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16972 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16973 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16974 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16975 to turn your writing into printable output.
16976 This happens in two stages:
16979 \begin_layout Enumerate
16980 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16981 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16983 a file with the extension,
16984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 \begin_layout Enumerate
16999 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17000 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17001 to use the commands in the
17005 file to produce printable output.
17008 \begin_layout Subsection
17009 Output file formats
17010 \begin_inset Index idx
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17022 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17030 Simple text (ASCII)
17031 \begin_inset Index idx
17034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17035 File formats ! ASCII
17043 \begin_layout Standard
17044 This file type has the extension
17045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17057 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
17058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17061 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17068 \begin_layout Standard
17069 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
17071 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17072 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17074 \begin_inset space ~
17080 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17081 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17082 bibliography (section
17083 \begin_inset space ~
17087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17089 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17094 If your document includes such material, use
17096 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17097 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17099 \begin_inset space ~
17103 \begin_inset space ~
17107 \begin_inset space ~
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17125 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17126 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
17129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17132 \begin_inset Index idx
17135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17136 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17145 \begin_layout Standard
17146 This file type has the extension
17147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17161 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17162 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17163 -Errors or to process it manually
17164 with console commands.
17165 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17166 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17167 's temporary directory whenever you
17168 view or export your document.
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17172 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17173 -file using the menu
17175 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17176 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17180 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17181 export variants are explained in section
17182 \begin_inset space ~
17186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17188 reference "subsec:Export"
17195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17197 \begin_inset Index idx
17200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_layout Standard
17210 This file type has the extension
17211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17231 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17232 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17233 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17238 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17239 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17240 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17241 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17242 when you view the DVI.
17243 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17246 \begin_layout Standard
17247 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17249 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17250 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17255 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17256 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17258 \begin_inset space ~
17264 The latter option uses the program
17266 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17272 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17275 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17276 font access (see section
17277 \begin_inset space ~
17281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17283 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17288 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17289 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17296 \begin_inset Index idx
17299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17300 File formats ! PostScript
17308 \begin_layout Standard
17309 This file type has the extension
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17322 PostScript was developed by the company
17326 as a printer language.
17327 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17329 PostScript can be seen as a
17330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17333 programming language
17334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17337 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17342 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17349 \begin_inset Index idx
17352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17354 packages ! pstricks
17364 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17367 \begin_layout Standard
17368 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17372 Encapsulated PostScript
17373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17376 (EPS, file extension
17377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17389 As \SpecialChar LyX
17390 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17391 convert them in the background to EPS.
17392 If, for example, you have 50
17393 \begin_inset space ~
17396 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17398 \begin_inset space ~
17401 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17402 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17404 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17405 EPS to avoid this problem.
17408 \begin_layout Standard
17409 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17418 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17420 \begin_inset Index idx
17423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17430 \begin_inset Index idx
17433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17442 \begin_layout Standard
17443 This file type has the extension
17444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17460 Portable Document Format
17461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17468 was derived from PostScript.
17469 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17478 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17479 looks exactly the same.
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17487 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17491 (JPG, file extension
17492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17519 Portable Network Graphics
17520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17523 (PNG, file extension
17524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17536 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17537 converts them in the
17538 background to one of these formats.
17539 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17540 will slow down your workflow.
17541 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17544 \begin_layout Standard
17545 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17547 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17553 \begin_layout Description
17555 \begin_inset space ~
17558 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17562 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17565 \begin_layout Description
17567 \begin_inset space ~
17574 ) This uses the program
17576 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17579 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17582 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17585 is a new engine, derived from
17589 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17590 access (see section
17591 \begin_inset space ~
17595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17597 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17602 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17603 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17608 \begin_layout Description
17610 \begin_inset space ~
17617 ) This uses the program
17622 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17628 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17629 font access (see section
17630 \begin_inset space ~
17634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17636 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17641 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17642 vertically written Japanese.
17645 \begin_layout Description
17647 \begin_inset space ~
17650 (cropped) This is the same as
17653 \begin_inset space ~
17658 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17659 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17660 to generate good-looking
17661 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17664 \begin_layout Description
17666 \begin_inset space ~
17669 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17673 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17677 \begin_layout Description
17679 \begin_inset space ~
17682 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17686 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17687 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17691 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17692 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17695 \begin_layout Standard
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17708 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17709 works without problems.
17710 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17711 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17715 \begin_inset space ~
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17728 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17738 \begin_inset Index idx
17741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17742 FileFormats ! XHTML
17748 \begin_inset Index idx
17751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17760 \begin_layout Standard
17761 This file type has the extension
17762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17774 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17775 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17776 When \SpecialChar LyX
17777 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17778 suitable for the purpose.
17779 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17785 between different formats, which are described in section
17787 Math Output in XHTML
17792 \begin_inset space ~
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 XHTML output remains
17802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17809 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17810 features are supported yet.
17814 and the World Wide Web
17818 Additional Features
17820 manual, for more information.
17823 \begin_layout Standard
17824 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17826 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17827 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17833 \begin_layout Subsection
17835 \begin_inset Index idx
17838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17847 \begin_layout Standard
17848 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17849 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17858 or use the toolbar button
17865 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17866 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17867 \begin_inset space ~
17871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17873 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17877 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17879 \begin_inset space ~
17883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17885 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17890 Further output formats can be selected via
17892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17893 View (Other Formats)
17895 or the toolbar button
17904 \begin_layout Standard
17905 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17906 viewer window using the menu
17908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17914 Update (Other Formats)
17919 \begin_layout Standard
17920 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17923 To have a real output, export your document.
17926 \begin_layout Section
17927 A few Words about Typography
17928 \begin_inset Index idx
17931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17940 \begin_layout Subsection
17941 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17942 \begin_inset Index idx
17945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 \begin_inset Index idx
17955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 \begin_layout Standard
17965 In \SpecialChar LyX
17967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17978 symbol comes in four variants: the
17995 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18001 \begin_layout Standard
18002 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18012 height_special "totalheight"
18017 backgroundcolor "none"
18020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18021 \begin_inset Tabular
18022 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18023 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18024 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18025 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18026 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18027 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18056 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18057 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 system key combination
18123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18124 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 and the em dash with
18139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18152 is the Mac label for the right
18162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18175 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 system key combination or
18199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18226 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18265 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18271 \begin_layout Standard
18272 Dashes can also be inserted with
18274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18276 \begin_inset space ~
18279 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18287 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18288 and 2014 for the en dash).
18291 \begin_layout Standard
18292 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18293 mode and has a length of its own.
18294 Here are some examples:
18297 \begin_layout Enumerate
18298 line- and page-breaks
18299 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18309 \begin_layout Enumerate
18311 \begin_inset space ~
18315 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18325 \begin_layout Enumerate
18326 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18327 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18337 \begin_layout Enumerate
18338 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18342 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18352 \begin_layout Standard
18354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18356 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18357 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18365 \begin_layout Subsection
18366 Dashes and Line Breaks
18367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18369 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18376 \begin_layout Standard
18377 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18378 case and locale, e.
18379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18385 \begin_layout Itemize
18386 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18387 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18390 \begin_layout Itemize
18391 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18395 \begin_layout Itemize
18396 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18397 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18400 \begin_layout Standard
18401 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18402 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 allows line breaks after hyphens
18414 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18416 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18419 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18422 \begin_layout Enumerate
18423 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18424 \begin_inset space ~
18427 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18429 The Elements of Typographic Style
18432 \begin_inset space ~
18435 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18438 \begin_layout Enumerate
18439 Unwanted line breaks
18444 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18446 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18449 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 Prevent Hyphenation
18461 \begin_inset space ~
18477 in \SpecialChar TeX
18479 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18480 , a protected space does not suffice
18484 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18492 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18493 in the document language.
18494 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18508 \begin_layout Itemize
18510 \begin_inset space ~
18514 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18524 height_special "totalheight"
18529 backgroundcolor "none"
18532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18541 \begin_layout Itemize
18543 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18553 height_special "totalheight"
18558 backgroundcolor "none"
18561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 \begin_inset space ~
18571 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18572 \begin_inset space ~
18575 – sont très utiles.
18578 \begin_layout Itemize
18583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18592 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18596 \begin_layout Standard
18597 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18598 \begin_inset space ~
18601 – in contrast to an overfull line
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18605 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18609 \begin_layout Standard
18610 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18614 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18615 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18616 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18621 \begin_layout Enumerate
18622 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18623 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18624 or \SpecialChar TeX
18630 \begin_layout Itemize
18632 \begin_inset space ~
18635 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18636 \begin_inset space ~
18639 – sont très utiles.
18643 \begin_layout Enumerate
18644 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18645 \begin_inset Newline newline
18650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18651 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18653 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18655 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18657 \begin_inset space ~
18663 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18665 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18667 \begin_inset space ~
18678 \begin_layout Itemize
18679 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18680 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18681 should be followed by
18682 a line break opportunity.
18685 \begin_layout Standard
18686 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18693 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18704 \begin_layout Enumerate
18705 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18706 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18707 or en dashes (see section
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18714 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18725 Changes and backwards compatibility
18728 \begin_layout Standard
18729 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18734 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18735 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18744 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18745 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18753 \begin_layout Standard
18754 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18759 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18761 prevents ligation to dashes.
18763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18770 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18775 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18776 after the input (unless the current text font is
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18785 The behavior was changed since
18786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18801 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18802 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18803 as non-breakable dashes.
18804 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18812 \begin_layout Standard
18815 \begin_inset space ~
18823 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18825 \begin_inset space ~
18828 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18832 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18833 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18834 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18836 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18840 If you used both literal and
18841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18848 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18850 \begin_inset space ~
18853 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18854 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18857 \begin_layout Subsection
18859 \begin_inset Index idx
18862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18871 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18878 \begin_layout Standard
18879 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18880 but automatically in the output.
18881 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18887 \begin_inset Index idx
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 following the rules of the document language.
18899 does not hyphenate text in the
18903 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18906 \begin_layout Standard
18908 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18912 font and with unusual constructs, like
18913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18921 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18922 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18923 This is done with the menu
18925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18928 \begin_inset space ~
18934 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18936 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18940 \begin_layout Standard
18941 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18942 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18953 would then see the hyphen
18954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18961 as a line break possibility.
18962 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18963 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18967 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18970 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18972 Prevent Hyphenation
18977 \begin_inset space ~
18985 \begin_layout Subsection
18987 \begin_inset Index idx
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19000 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19003 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19010 \begin_layout Standard
19011 When \SpecialChar LyX
19012 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19013 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19015 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19021 appropriate amount of space.
19022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19025 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19027 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19028 gets after another word.
19031 \begin_layout Standard
19032 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19033 not work in all cases.
19035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19046 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19047 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19050 \begin_layout Standard
19051 Here are some examples of
19055 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19058 \begin_layout Itemize
19063 \begin_layout Itemize
19068 \begin_layout Standard
19069 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19072 \begin_layout Itemize
19074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19078 this is too much space!
19081 \begin_layout Itemize
19086 \begin_layout Standard
19087 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19090 \begin_layout Standard
19091 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19094 \begin_layout Enumerate
19098 \begin_inset space ~
19103 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19104 \begin_inset space ~
19108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19110 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19115 \begin_inset Index idx
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19119 Spaces ! inter-word
19127 \begin_layout Enumerate
19131 \begin_inset space ~
19136 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19137 \begin_inset space ~
19141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19143 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19148 \begin_inset Index idx
19151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19160 \begin_layout Enumerate
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19181 \begin_inset space ~
19186 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19187 This function is also bound to
19190 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19196 \begin_layout Standard
19197 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19200 \begin_layout Itemize
19202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19206 \begin_inset space \space{}
19209 this is too much space!
19212 \begin_layout Itemize
19213 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19217 \begin_layout Standard
19218 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19219 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19221 will take care of this.
19224 \begin_layout Standard
19225 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19235 feature described in the section
19237 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19242 Additional Features
19247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19249 \begin_inset Index idx
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 Typography ! Quotation marks
19259 \begin_inset Index idx
19262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 Quotation marks | see
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19293 \begin_layout Standard
19295 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19296 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19297 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19307 The keyboard character,
19311 , generates this automatically.
19314 \begin_layout Standard
19315 You can specify what character the
19319 key produces by using the submenu
19325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19329 \begin_inset Index idx
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 Document ! Settings
19338 dialog and switching the
19342 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19343 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19345 \begin_inset space ~
19351 \begin_layout Labeling
19352 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19364 \begin_inset space ~
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset Quotes els
19376 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19390 \begin_inset Quotes els
19394 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19397 quotation marks (as common, e.
19398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19404 \begin_layout Labeling
19405 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19408 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19412 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19416 \begin_inset space ~
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19424 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19428 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19434 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19438 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19442 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19446 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19449 quotation marks (as common, e.
19450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19456 \begin_layout Labeling
19457 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19460 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19464 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19468 \begin_inset space ~
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19480 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19486 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19490 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19494 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19498 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19501 quotation marks (as common, e.
19502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19508 \begin_layout Labeling
19509 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19512 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19516 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19520 \begin_inset space ~
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19532 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19538 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19542 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19546 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19550 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19553 quotation marks (as common, e.
19554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19560 \begin_layout Labeling
19561 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19564 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19568 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19572 \begin_inset space ~
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19584 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19590 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19594 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19598 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19602 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19605 quotation marks (as common, e.
19606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19609 g., in Switzerland)
19612 \begin_layout Labeling
19613 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19616 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19620 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19624 \begin_inset space ~
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19632 \begin_inset Quotes als
19636 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19642 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19646 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19650 \begin_inset Quotes als
19654 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19657 quotation marks (as common, e.
19658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19664 \begin_layout Labeling
19665 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19668 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19672 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19676 \begin_inset space ~
19680 \begin_inset space ~
19684 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19688 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19694 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19698 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19702 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19706 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19709 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19712 \begin_layout Labeling
19713 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19716 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19720 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19724 \begin_inset space ~
19728 \begin_inset space ~
19732 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19736 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19742 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19746 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19750 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19754 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19757 quotation marks (as common, e.
19758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19761 g., in Great Britain)
19764 \begin_layout Labeling
19765 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19768 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19772 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19784 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19788 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19794 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19798 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19802 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19806 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19809 quotation marks (as common, e.
19810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19816 \begin_layout Labeling
19817 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19820 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19824 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19828 \begin_inset space ~
19832 \begin_inset space ~
19836 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19840 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19846 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19850 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19854 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19858 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19861 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19867 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19868 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19869 the inner marks differ).
19877 \begin_layout Labeling
19878 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19881 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19885 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19889 \begin_inset space ~
19893 \begin_inset space ~
19897 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19901 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19907 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19911 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19915 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19919 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19922 quotation marks (as common, e.
19923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19929 \begin_layout Labeling
19930 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19933 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19937 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19941 \begin_inset space ~
19945 \begin_inset space ~
19949 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19953 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19959 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19963 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19967 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19971 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19974 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19977 \begin_layout Labeling
19978 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19979 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19987 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19993 \begin_inset space ~
19997 \begin_inset space ~
20003 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20011 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20015 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20019 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20023 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20027 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20030 quotation marks (as common, e.
20031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20040 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20048 \begin_layout Labeling
20049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20050 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20058 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20064 \begin_inset space ~
20068 \begin_inset space ~
20074 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20082 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20086 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20090 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20094 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20098 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20101 quotation marks (as common, e.
20102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20105 g., in North Korea and China)
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20111 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20119 \begin_layout Standard
20120 Inner quotation marks
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20126 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20127 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20135 does not necessarily mean
20136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20144 This is why we call them
20145 \begin_inset Quotes els
20149 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20165 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20167 \begin_inset Quotes els
20171 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20174 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20177 arg "quote-insert inner"
20182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20188 \begin_layout Standard
20189 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20190 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20191 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20192 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20193 If you check the setting
20195 Use dynamic quotation marks
20199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20203 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20204 they appear in a special color).
20205 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20206 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20211 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20214 \begin_layout Standard
20215 Individual quotation marks (i.
20216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20219 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20220 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20224 \begin_layout Subsection
20226 \begin_inset Index idx
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 Typography ! Ligatures
20236 \begin_inset Index idx
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20270 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20277 \begin_layout Standard
20278 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20279 print them as single characters.
20280 These groups are known as
20285 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20286 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20288 Here are the standard ligatures:
20291 \begin_layout Itemize
20295 \begin_layout Itemize
20299 \begin_layout Itemize
20303 \begin_layout Itemize
20307 \begin_layout Itemize
20311 \begin_layout Standard
20312 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20315 \begin_layout Standard
20316 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20317 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20325 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20341 To break a ligature, use
20343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20346 \begin_inset space ~
20353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20364 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20381 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20389 \begin_layout Subsection
20391 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20393 \begin_inset Index idx
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 \begin_layout Standard
20409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20410 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20414 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20417 \begin_layout Description
20419 The name of the game.
20422 \begin_layout Description
20424 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20428 \begin_layout Description
20430 The \SpecialChar TeX
20431 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20435 \begin_layout Description
20436 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20437 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20441 \begin_layout Standard
20442 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20448 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20456 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20457 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20458 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20459 converges to the number
20460 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20463 : The actual version is
20464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20472 , the previous one was
20473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20484 \begin_layout Subsection
20486 \begin_inset Index idx
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 \begin_layout Standard
20499 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20500 space between two words.
20501 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20511 for units use the menu
20513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20514 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20516 \begin_inset space ~
20524 arg "space-insert thin"
20530 \begin_layout Standard
20531 Here is an example to show the differences:
20534 \begin_layout Standard
20535 \begin_inset Tabular
20536 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20537 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20538 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20539 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 \begin_inset space ~
20550 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 space between number and unit
20569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20578 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 half space between number and unit
20603 \begin_layout Subsection
20605 \begin_inset Index idx
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20617 \begin_layout Standard
20618 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20620 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20621 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20622 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20623 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20624 These bits of text became known as
20635 \begin_layout Standard
20636 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20637 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20638 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20639 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20640 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20641 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20642 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20643 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20644 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20645 \begin_inset Newline newline
20653 \begin_inset Newline newline
20661 \begin_inset Newline newline
20664 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20665 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20666 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20668 \begin_inset space ~
20672 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20674 key "latexcompanion"
20680 \begin_inset space ~
20684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20691 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20692 's page break mechanism.
20695 \begin_layout Chapter
20696 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20699 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20706 \begin_layout Standard
20707 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20710 \begin_inset space ~
20716 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20719 \begin_layout Section
20721 \begin_inset Index idx
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20740 \begin_layout Standard
20742 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20745 \begin_layout Description
20748 \begin_inset space ~
20751 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20752 \begin_inset Newline newline
20756 \begin_inset Note Note
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20768 \begin_layout Description
20769 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20770 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20771 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20774 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20775 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20777 \begin_inset space ~
20783 \begin_inset Newline newline
20787 \begin_inset Note Comment
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20800 \begin_layout Description
20802 \begin_inset space ~
20805 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20806 set in the document settings under
20808 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20810 \begin_inset space ~
20816 \begin_inset Newline newline
20820 \begin_inset Newline newline
20824 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20834 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20839 of a comment that appears in the output.
20845 \begin_inset Newline newline
20849 \begin_inset Newline newline
20852 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20855 \begin_layout Standard
20856 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20868 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20871 \begin_layout Section
20873 \begin_inset Index idx
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20885 name "sec:Footnotes"
20892 \begin_layout Standard
20894 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20900 or the toolbar button
20903 arg "footnote-insert"
20915 \begin_inset Graphics
20916 filename clipart/footnote.png
20925 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20926 's representation of your footnote.
20936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20955 label, the box will
20959 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20960 Clicking on the box label again will close
20973 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20974 and click on the footnote
20989 \begin_layout Standard
20990 Here is an example footnote:
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21007 \begin_layout Standard
21008 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21009 position where the footnote box is placed.
21010 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21011 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21012 according to the document class.
21014 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21015 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21021 ey are described in the
21024 \begin_inset space ~
21032 \begin_layout Section
21034 \begin_inset Index idx
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21046 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21053 \begin_layout Standard
21054 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21056 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21060 \begin_inset space ~
21065 or the toolbar button
21068 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21094 appearing within your text.
21095 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21096 's representation of your margin
21105 \begin_layout Standard
21106 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21110 \begin_inset Marginal
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 This is a marginal note.
21123 \begin_layout Standard
21124 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21125 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21126 pages, right on odd pages.
21129 \begin_layout Standard
21130 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21133 \begin_inset space ~
21141 \begin_inset space ~
21149 \begin_layout Section
21150 Graphics and Images
21151 \begin_inset Index idx
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 \begin_inset Index idx
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21173 name "sec:Graphics"
21180 \begin_layout Standard
21181 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21182 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21185 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21194 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21197 \begin_layout Standard
21198 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21203 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21204 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21206 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21207 \begin_inset space ~
21211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21213 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21220 \begin_layout Standard
21225 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21226 of the image in the output.
21227 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21231 \begin_inset space ~
21235 \begin_inset space ~
21244 \begin_inset space ~
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_inset space ~
21257 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21258 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21266 \begin_layout Standard
21270 \begin_inset space ~
21274 \begin_inset space ~
21279 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21280 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21282 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21287 \begin_inset space ~
21292 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21293 with the image size is printed.
21296 \begin_layout Standard
21297 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21298 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21300 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21303 \begin_layout Standard
21305 \begin_inset Graphics
21306 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21314 \begin_layout Standard
21315 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21316 the image into a float, see section
21317 \begin_inset space ~
21321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21323 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21330 \begin_layout Subsection
21332 \begin_inset Index idx
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21344 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21351 \begin_layout Standard
21352 You can insert images in any known file format.
21353 But as we explained in section
21354 \begin_inset space ~
21358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21360 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21364 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21366 therefore uses the program
21370 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21371 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21372 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21373 \begin_inset space ~
21377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21379 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21386 \begin_layout Standard
21387 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21390 \begin_layout Description
21392 \begin_inset space ~
21395 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21396 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21397 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21401 Graphics Interchange Format
21402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21405 (GIF, file extension
21406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21418 \begin_inset Index idx
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21453 Portable Network Graphics
21454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21457 (PNG, file extension
21458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21470 \begin_inset Index idx
21473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21505 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21509 (JPG, file extension
21510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21534 \begin_inset Index idx
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 \begin_layout Description
21570 \begin_inset space ~
21573 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21575 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21576 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21577 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21578 \begin_inset Newline newline
21581 Scalable image formats can be
21582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21585 Scalable Vector Graphics
21586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21589 (SVG, file extension
21590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21602 \begin_inset Index idx
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21637 Encapsulated PostScript
21638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21641 (EPS, file extension
21642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21654 \begin_inset Index idx
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21689 Portable Document Format
21690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21693 (PDF, file extension
21694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21706 \begin_inset Index idx
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21724 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21725 result will not be scalable.
21726 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21740 \begin_layout Standard
21741 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21748 \begin_layout Subsection
21749 Grouping of Image Settings
21750 \begin_inset Index idx
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21754 Images ! Settings grouping
21762 \begin_layout Standard
21763 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21765 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21766 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21768 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21769 need to manually change each of them.
21773 \begin_layout Standard
21774 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21777 \begin_inset space ~
21781 \begin_inset space ~
21793 \begin_inset space ~
21797 \begin_inset space ~
21803 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21804 and checking the name of the desired group.
21807 \begin_layout Section
21809 \begin_inset Index idx
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21828 \begin_layout Standard
21829 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21832 arg "tabular-insert"
21837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21841 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21842 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21843 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21846 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21847 from the rest of the table.
21848 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21849 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21851 Here is an example table:
21854 \begin_layout Standard
21856 \begin_inset Tabular
21857 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21858 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22060 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22064 \begin_layout Standard
22066 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22067 This corresponds to the
22068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22075 table style listed in the style selection.
22078 \begin_layout Standard
22080 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22081 Other available styles include:
22084 \begin_layout Itemize
22086 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22095 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22099 \begin_layout Itemize
22101 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22102 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22105 \begin_layout Itemize
22107 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22116 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22117 bold top/bottom lines (see
22128 \begin_layout Standard
22130 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22131 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22132 button can be changed in
22134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22135 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22139 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22143 \begin_layout Subsection
22147 \begin_layout Standard
22148 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22151 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22155 This brings up the table dialog.
22156 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22157 cursor is placed currently.
22158 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22159 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22160 done on all of your selection.
22163 \begin_layout Standard
22164 In addition to the table dialog, the
22167 \begin_inset space ~
22172 helps you in setting table properties.
22173 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22176 \begin_layout Standard
22180 \begin_inset space ~
22185 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22186 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22187 current cell respectively.
22188 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22190 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22191 of text, see section
22192 \begin_inset space ~
22196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22198 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22205 \begin_layout Standard
22206 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22207 using the check box
22216 This will merge the cells to
22220 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22221 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22222 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22223 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22224 in the last row without the upper border:
22227 \begin_layout Standard
22229 \begin_inset Tabular
22230 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22231 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22232 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22233 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22234 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22235 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22246 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 \begin_layout Standard
22367 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22368 -arguments for the table.
22369 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22370 explained in the chapter
22377 \begin_inset space ~
22383 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22384 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22385 but are visible in the output.
22388 \begin_layout Standard
22389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 Most DVI-viewers are
22401 able to display rotations.
22409 \begin_layout Standard
22414 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22419 adds lines for all cell borders.
22422 \begin_layout Subsection
22424 \begin_inset Index idx
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 Tables ! Multi-page
22434 \begin_inset Index idx
22437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 \begin_layout Standard
22447 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22450 \begin_inset space ~
22454 \begin_inset space ~
22462 \begin_inset space ~
22467 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22468 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22471 \begin_layout Description
22476 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22477 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22478 Except for the first page, if
22481 \begin_inset space ~
22489 \begin_layout Description
22493 \begin_inset space ~
22498 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22499 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22502 \begin_layout Description
22507 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22508 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22509 except for the last page, if
22512 \begin_inset space ~
22520 \begin_layout Description
22524 \begin_inset space ~
22529 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22530 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22533 \begin_layout Description
22534 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22535 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22541 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22544 \begin_inset space ~
22552 \begin_layout Standard
22553 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22554 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22555 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22561 In this context, first means first in this order:
22564 \begin_inset space ~
22576 \begin_inset space ~
22581 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22584 \begin_layout Standard
22586 \begin_inset Tabular
22587 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22588 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22589 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22590 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22591 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22592 <row endfirsthead="true">
22593 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22604 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <row endfirsthead="true">
22624 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <row endhead="true">
22657 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22668 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 <row endhead="true">
22688 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 <row endfoot="true">
22721 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22732 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23713 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23897 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23990 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24021 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24145 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24207 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24362 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24424 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24548 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24579 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24641 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24672 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24702 <row endlastfoot="true">
24703 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24723 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24740 \begin_layout Subsection
24742 \begin_inset Index idx
24745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24754 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24761 \begin_layout Standard
24762 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24763 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24764 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24765 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24769 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24772 \begin_layout Standard
24773 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24774 for the column in the table dialog.
24775 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24776 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24780 \begin_layout Standard
24782 \begin_inset Tabular
24783 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24784 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24785 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24786 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24787 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24807 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24876 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24932 This is longer now.
24937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24989 This is longer now.
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 \begin_layout Standard
25021 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25022 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25027 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25028 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25034 Selection with the mouse or with
25038 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25039 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25040 the selection from outside the table.
25043 \begin_layout Section
25045 \begin_inset Index idx
25048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25064 \begin_layout Subsection
25068 \begin_layout Standard
25069 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25070 have a fixed location.
25072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25079 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25087 \begin_inset space ~
25092 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25093 too many notes on the current page.
25096 \begin_layout Standard
25097 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25098 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25099 and pages without text.
25100 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25101 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25102 Floats are therefore numbered.
25103 Referencing is described in section
25104 \begin_inset space ~
25108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25110 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25117 \begin_layout Standard
25118 To insert a float, use the menu
25120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25124 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25125 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25127 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25128 \begin_inset Index idx
25131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25138 paragraph within the float.
25139 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25140 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25141 left-clicking on the box label.
25142 A closed float box looks like this:
25143 \begin_inset Graphics
25144 filename clipart/float.png
25149 – a gray button with a red label.
25152 \begin_layout Standard
25153 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25155 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25158 \begin_layout Subsection
25160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25162 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25167 \begin_inset Index idx
25170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25171 Floats ! Figure floats
25179 \begin_layout Standard
25181 \begin_inset space ~
25185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25187 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25191 was created using the menu
25193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25194 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25200 arg "float-insert figure"
25204 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25213 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25217 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25218 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25220 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25222 \begin_inset space ~
25230 arg "layout-paragraph"
25236 \begin_layout Standard
25237 \begin_inset Float figure
25244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 \begin_inset Graphics
25247 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25262 name "fig:A-star-in"
25279 \begin_layout Standard
25280 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25281 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25292 ) and refer to it using the menu
25294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25300 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25304 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25305 vague references like
25306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25313 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25314 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25324 For more about cross-references, see section
25325 \begin_inset space ~
25329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25331 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25338 \begin_layout Standard
25339 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25340 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25341 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25342 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25343 as described in section
25344 \begin_inset space ~
25348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25350 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25356 \begin_inset space ~
25360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25362 reference "fig:Two-images"
25366 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25367 You can also set the images one below the other.
25369 \begin_inset space ~
25373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25375 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25382 reference "fig:Star"
25386 are the subfigures.
25389 \begin_layout Standard
25390 \begin_inset Float figure
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25398 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25402 \begin_inset Float figure
25409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25415 name "fig:Undefinable"
25427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 \begin_inset Graphics
25429 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25445 \begin_inset Float figure
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25453 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 \begin_inset Graphics
25472 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25484 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25491 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25496 name "fig:Two-images"
25513 \begin_layout Subsection
25515 \begin_inset Index idx
25518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25519 Floats ! Table floats
25527 \begin_layout Standard
25528 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25531 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25534 or the toolbar button
25537 arg "float-insert table"
25541 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25542 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25543 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25545 \begin_inset space ~
25549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25551 reference "tab:Table-float"
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 \begin_inset Float table
25566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25572 name "tab:Table-float"
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 \begin_inset Tabular
25587 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25588 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25589 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25590 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25591 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25718 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25742 \end{array}\right]$
25750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25784 \begin_layout Subsection
25786 \begin_inset Index idx
25789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25798 \begin_layout Standard
25800 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25801 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25802 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25804 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25812 \begin_inset space ~
25820 \begin_layout Section
25822 \begin_inset Index idx
25825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25836 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25838 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25839 \begin_inset space \space{}
25846 \begin_layout Standard
25847 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25848 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25854 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25855 and its alignment within the page.
25858 \begin_layout Standard
25860 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25870 height_special "totalheight"
25875 backgroundcolor "none"
25878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 This is a minipage.
25882 The text is set in an italic style.
25885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25888 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25889 another formatting.
25897 \begin_layout Standard
25898 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25901 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25905 as described in section
25906 \begin_inset space ~
25910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25912 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25917 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25934 height_special "totalheight"
25939 backgroundcolor "none"
25942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25944 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25950 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25954 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25964 height_special "totalheight"
25969 backgroundcolor "none"
25972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25973 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25974 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25982 \begin_layout Standard
25983 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25989 \begin_layout Standard
25990 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25992 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25999 \begin_inset space ~
26007 \begin_layout Chapter
26008 Mathematical Formulas
26009 \begin_inset Index idx
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26019 \begin_inset Index idx
26022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26053 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26060 \begin_layout Standard
26061 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26066 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26069 \begin_layout Section
26071 \begin_inset Index idx
26074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26097 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26099 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26100 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26101 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26109 \begin_layout Standard
26110 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26114 \begin_inset space ~
26119 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26122 \begin_layout Standard
26123 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26124 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26127 \begin_layout Standard
26128 This is a line with an inline formula
26129 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26135 \begin_layout Standard
26136 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26137 paragraph, like this one:
26138 \begin_inset Formula
26145 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26148 \begin_layout Standard
26150 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26152 For example, typing
26153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26166 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26167 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26171 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26174 \begin_inset space ~
26182 \begin_layout Subsection
26183 Navigating in Formulas
26184 \begin_inset Index idx
26187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26196 \begin_layout Standard
26197 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26198 achieved with the arrow keys.
26200 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26201 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26206 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26207 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26211 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26215 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26218 \end{array}\right]$
26226 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26231 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26232 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26235 \begin_layout Standard
26240 , printed in this document as
26241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26245 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26252 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26253 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26254 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26259 For example, if you want
26260 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26268 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26278 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26282 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26287 , since in the latter case only the
26290 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26295 will be under the square root sign:
26296 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26302 \begin_layout Standard
26303 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26305 \begin_inset Formula
26307 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26316 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26317 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26320 \begin_layout Subsection
26324 \begin_layout Standard
26325 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26326 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26330 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26331 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26332 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26333 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26334 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26338 \begin_layout Subsection
26339 Exponents and Subscripts
26340 \begin_inset Index idx
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26350 \begin_inset Index idx
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26362 \begin_layout Standard
26363 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26366 arg "math-superscript"
26372 arg "math-subscript"
26375 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26377 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26380 , type in a formula
26383 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26393 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26399 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26403 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26409 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26415 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26424 , you have to use an extra
26428 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26429 For example, if you want
26430 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26436 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26442 Subscripts are similar: To get
26443 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26449 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26457 \begin_layout Subsection
26459 \begin_inset Index idx
26462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26471 \begin_layout Standard
26472 Create a fraction either with the command
26478 or by using the icon
26481 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26487 \begin_inset space ~
26493 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26494 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26495 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26500 To move back up, press
26505 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26506 \begin_inset Formula
26508 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26511 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26519 \begin_layout Subsection
26521 \begin_inset Index idx
26524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26533 \begin_layout Standard
26534 Roots can be created using the
26537 \begin_inset space ~
26545 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26551 arg "math-insert \\root"
26573 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26579 always produces a square root.
26582 \begin_layout Subsection
26583 Operators with Limits
26584 \begin_inset Index idx
26587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 \begin_inset Index idx
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26606 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26615 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26619 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26622 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26623 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26624 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26625 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26626 The sum operator will automatically place its
26627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26634 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26636 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26640 \begin_inset Formula
26642 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26647 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26651 \begin_layout Standard
26652 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26654 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26655 behind the operator and using the menu
26657 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26658 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26660 \begin_inset space ~
26664 \begin_inset space ~
26678 \begin_layout Standard
26679 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26688 \begin_inset Index idx
26691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 \begin_inset Formula
26700 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26705 which will place the
26706 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26718 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26719 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26725 \begin_layout Standard
26726 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26733 Have a look at section
26734 \begin_inset space ~
26738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26740 reference "subsec:Functions"
26744 for an explanation of function macros.
26747 \begin_layout Subsection
26749 \begin_inset Index idx
26752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26761 \begin_layout Standard
26762 Most math symbols can be found in the
26765 \begin_inset space ~
26770 under one of several categories; including
26787 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26791 \begin_layout Standard
26792 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26793 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26794 don't have to use the
26797 \begin_inset space ~
26802 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26804 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26807 \begin_layout Subsection
26809 \begin_inset Index idx
26812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26821 \begin_layout Standard
26822 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26828 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26834 \begin_inset space ~
26842 arg "math-insert \\space"
26846 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26847 For example, the sequence
26852 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26855 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26857 \begin_inset Graphics
26858 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26863 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26864 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26865 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26866 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26867 , because they are negative
26869 Here are two examples:
26872 \begin_layout Standard
26882 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26888 \begin_layout Standard
26898 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26904 \begin_layout Subsection
26906 \begin_inset Index idx
26909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26918 name "subsec:Functions"
26925 \begin_layout Standard
26929 \begin_inset space ~
26934 contains under the button
26937 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26940 a number of function macros, such as
26941 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26945 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26953 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26960 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26961 avoid confusions, because
26962 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26966 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26972 \begin_layout Standard
26973 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26975 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26979 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26985 \begin_layout Standard
26986 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26987 are placed, as described in section
26988 \begin_inset space ~
26992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26994 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27001 \begin_layout Subsection
27003 \begin_inset Index idx
27006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27015 \begin_layout Standard
27016 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27018 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27019 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27020 commands, for example, to enter
27021 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27024 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27025 Our example is entered by typing
27030 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27037 \begin_inset space ~
27041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27043 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27047 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27050 \begin_layout Standard
27051 \begin_inset Float table
27058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27064 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27068 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 \begin_inset Tabular
27079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27167 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27221 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27275 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27329 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27383 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27437 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27491 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27599 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27644 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27665 \begin_layout Standard
27666 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27677 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27680 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27684 \begin_layout Section
27685 Brackets and Delimiters
27686 \begin_inset Index idx
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27696 \begin_inset Index idx
27699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27708 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27715 \begin_layout Standard
27716 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27718 For some purposes, using just the keys
27723 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27724 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27725 toolbar delimiter icon
27728 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27732 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27733 \begin_inset Formula
27735 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27743 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27744 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27748 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27751 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27757 \begin_inset Formula
27759 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27767 \begin_layout Standard
27768 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27769 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27773 \begin_layout Standard
27774 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27775 left side and right side.
27776 If you use the option
27779 \begin_inset space ~
27784 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27785 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27787 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27792 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27793 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27796 \begin_layout Standard
27797 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27798 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27799 is to go inside the brackets.
27800 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27805 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27806 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27807 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27811 arg "math-delim ( )"
27817 \begin_layout Section
27818 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27819 \begin_inset Index idx
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27829 \begin_inset Index idx
27832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27839 \begin_inset Index idx
27842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27856 \begin_inset space ~
27864 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27868 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27869 Here is an example:
27870 \begin_inset Formula
27872 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27881 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27882 \begin_inset space ~
27886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27888 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27893 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27894 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27895 This alignment is set in the box
27900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27949 for every column as default.
27950 For example, the sequence
27951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27962 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27963 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27964 corresponds to the relevant column.
27965 The result will look like this:
27966 \begin_inset Formula
27969 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27970 column & has & has\,right\\
27971 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27984 arg "newline-insert newline"
27987 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27988 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27993 or the math toolbar.
27996 \begin_layout Standard
27997 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27998 It can be created with the menu
28000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28001 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28003 \begin_inset space ~
28015 Here is an example:
28016 \begin_inset Formula
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28031 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28034 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28037 arg "newline-insert newline"
28041 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28046 arg "newline-insert newline"
28049 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28057 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28058 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28059 A new row is created by every further entry of
28062 arg "newline-insert newline"
28066 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28067 Here is an example:
28068 \begin_inset Formula
28070 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28071 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28076 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28077 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28078 \begin_inset Formula
28080 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28088 \begin_layout Standard
28089 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28096 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28097 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28100 reference "eq:asquared"
28105 The other types are described in section
28106 \begin_inset space ~
28110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28112 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28119 \begin_layout Section
28120 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28121 \begin_inset Index idx
28124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 Math ! Formula numbering
28131 \begin_inset Index idx
28134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 Math ! Referencing formulas
28141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28143 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28151 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28153 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28154 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28156 \begin_inset space ~
28160 \begin_inset space ~
28168 arg "math-number-toggle"
28172 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28173 within parentheses.
28174 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28175 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28176 the document class.
28177 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28178 separated by a dot:
28179 \begin_inset Formula
28189 arg "math-number-toggle"
28192 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28193 You can only number displayed formulas.
28196 \begin_layout Standard
28197 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28199 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28200 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28202 \begin_inset space ~
28206 \begin_inset space ~
28214 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28217 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28218 \begin_inset Formula
28221 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28227 To number all lines use the shortcut
28230 arg "math-number-toggle"
28236 \begin_layout Standard
28237 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28240 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28241 A label is inserted with the menu
28243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28252 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28253 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28254 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28266 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28267 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28268 We inserted in the following example the label
28269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28276 in the second line:
28277 \begin_inset Formula
28279 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28280 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28285 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28286 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28287 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28291 \begin_inset space ~
28299 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28303 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28304 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28305 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28306 as the formula number:
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28310 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28313 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28322 's cross-reference box are described in section
28323 \begin_inset space ~
28327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28329 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28334 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28342 \begin_layout Section
28343 User defined math macros
28344 \begin_inset Index idx
28347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28358 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28359 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28360 Math macros are explained in section
28363 \begin_inset space ~
28375 \begin_layout Section
28379 \begin_layout Subsection
28381 \begin_inset Index idx
28384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28393 \begin_layout Standard
28394 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28395 To set a font in a formula, use the
28398 \begin_inset space ~
28406 arg "math-insert \\font"
28409 , or enter its command, listed in table
28410 \begin_inset space ~
28414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28416 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28423 \begin_layout Standard
28424 \begin_inset Float table
28431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28432 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28437 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28441 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28451 \begin_inset Tabular
28452 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28453 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28454 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28455 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28487 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28514 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28574 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28601 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28623 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28630 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28643 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28659 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28693 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28715 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28721 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28729 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28742 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28758 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28792 \begin_layout Standard
28793 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28801 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28804 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28806 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28810 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28829 \begin_layout Standard
28830 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28831 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28836 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28837 space when you need a space in the box.
28838 Here is an example where
28839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28850 denotes the set of numbers:
28851 \begin_inset Formula
28853 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28861 \begin_layout Standard
28862 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28863 You can, for example, put a character in
28872 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28876 \begin_inset Newline newline
28879 So it is better not to use this feature.
28882 \begin_layout Standard
28883 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28884 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28888 \begin_inset Newline newline
28891 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28897 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28898 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28904 \begin_layout Standard
28911 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28918 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28920 \begin_inset space ~
28928 \begin_layout Subsection
28930 \begin_inset Index idx
28933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28942 \begin_layout Standard
28943 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28945 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28949 \begin_inset space ~
28953 \begin_inset space ~
28961 \begin_inset space ~
28969 arg "math-insert \\font"
28973 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28974 in black instead of blue.
28975 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28976 Here is an example:
28977 \begin_inset Formula
28980 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28981 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28990 \begin_layout Subsection
28992 \begin_inset Index idx
28995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29004 \begin_layout Standard
29005 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29006 automatically chosen in most situations.
29024 For most characters,
29032 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29033 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29038 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29039 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29040 thinks are appropriate.
29041 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29044 arg "math-insert \\style"
29048 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29049 For example, you can set
29050 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29053 , which is normally in
29062 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29066 The four styles are used in the following example:
29069 \begin_layout Standard
29070 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29074 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29078 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29082 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29088 \begin_layout Standard
29089 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29090 is set in a particular size with the menu
29092 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29094 \begin_inset space ~
29099 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29100 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29101 will be adjusted to correspond.
29102 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29117 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29123 \begin_layout Section
29124 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29126 \begin_inset Index idx
29129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29136 \begin_inset Index idx
29139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29148 \begin_layout Standard
29150 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29151 that are in common use.
29154 \begin_layout Subsection
29155 Enabling AMS-Support
29158 \begin_layout Standard
29159 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29160 the document by selecting the checkbox
29163 \begin_inset space ~
29167 \begin_inset space ~
29171 \begin_inset space ~
29178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29182 \begin_inset Index idx
29185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29186 Document ! Settings
29194 \begin_inset space ~
29200 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29201 -errors in formulas,
29202 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29205 \begin_layout Subsection
29207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29209 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29214 \begin_inset Index idx
29217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29218 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29226 \begin_layout Standard
29227 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29228 provides a selection of different formula types.
29230 allows you to choose between
29251 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29252 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29259 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29262 \begin_layout Chapter
29266 \begin_layout Section
29268 \begin_inset Index idx
29271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29280 name "sec:Cross-References"
29287 \begin_layout Standard
29288 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29289 's strengths is cross-references.
29290 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29292 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29293 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29294 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29297 \begin_layout Enumerate
29301 \begin_layout Enumerate
29302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29304 name "enu:Second-item"
29311 \begin_layout Enumerate
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29316 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29321 or by pressing the toolbar button
29328 A gray label box like this:
29329 \begin_inset Graphics
29330 filename clipart/label.png
29334 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29336 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29371 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29372 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29388 \begin_layout Standard
29389 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29394 or the toolbar button
29397 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29401 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29402 \begin_inset Graphics
29403 filename clipart/reference.png
29407 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29409 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29422 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29426 \begin_layout Standard
29427 As an alternative to
29429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29432 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29437 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29438 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29440 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29452 \begin_layout Standard
29453 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29454 \begin_inset space ~
29458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29460 reference "enu:Second-item"
29467 \begin_layout Standard
29468 It is recommended to use a protected space
29472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29473 described in section
29474 \begin_inset space ~
29478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29480 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29489 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29490 line breaks between them.
29493 \begin_layout Standard
29494 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29497 \begin_layout Description
29498 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29501 reference "fig:Two-images"
29508 \begin_layout Description
29509 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29510 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29522 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29529 \begin_layout Description
29530 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29531 \begin_inset space ~
29535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29536 LatexCommand pageref
29537 reference "fig:Two-images"
29544 \begin_layout Description
29546 \begin_inset space ~
29550 \begin_inset space ~
29553 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29555 LatexCommand vpageref
29556 reference "fig:Two-images"
29561 \begin_inset Newline newline
29564 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29565 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29566 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29567 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29568 it prints “on the next page”.
29569 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29572 \begin_layout Description
29574 \begin_inset space ~
29578 \begin_inset space ~
29582 \begin_inset space ~
29585 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29588 reference "fig:Two-images"
29593 \begin_inset Newline newline
29596 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29602 ; otherwise it behaves like
29606 \begin_inset space ~
29610 \begin_inset space ~
29619 \begin_layout Description
29621 \begin_inset space ~
29624 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29625 \begin_inset Newline newline
29629 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29637 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29647 \begin_inset Index idx
29650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29652 packages ! prettyref
29658 \begin_inset Index idx
29661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29663 packages ! refstyle
29674 \begin_inset Newline newline
29677 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29678 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29681 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29686 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29694 is the default and preferred because
29698 supports only English documents.
29699 The format is specified by using the command
29711 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29712 preamble of the document.
29713 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29731 \begin_inset Newline newline
29738 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29743 \begin_inset Newline newline
29754 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29755 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29757 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29758 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29763 , you might do so as follows:
29764 \begin_inset Newline newline
29771 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29776 \begin_inset Newline newline
29779 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29780 the package documentation
29781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29783 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29789 \begin_inset Newline newline
29800 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29807 \begin_layout Description
29809 \begin_inset space ~
29812 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29814 LatexCommand nameref
29815 reference "fig:Two-images"
29822 \begin_layout Description
29824 \begin_inset space ~
29827 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29828 label for the reference:
29829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29830 LatexCommand labelonly
29831 reference "fig:Two-images"
29836 \begin_inset Newline newline
29839 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29840 Code, if you want to issue a command
29841 that \SpecialChar LyX
29847 , then you may want to use the
29850 \begin_inset space ~
29855 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29865 This is the form needed for e.
29866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29870 \begin_inset space \space{}
29877 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29878 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29880 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29884 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29888 \begin_layout Standard
29889 You can only use the style
29893 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29897 is always possible.
29900 \begin_layout Standard
29901 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29902 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29904 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29905 \begin_inset space ~
29909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29911 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29918 \begin_layout Standard
29919 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29923 \begin_inset space ~
29927 \begin_inset space ~
29932 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29933 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29936 \begin_inset space ~
29941 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29942 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29945 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29952 You can change labels at any time.
29953 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29954 do not need to think about this.
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29958 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29960 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29964 \begin_layout Standard
29965 References are described in detail in the section
29966 \begin_inset space ~
29976 \begin_inset space ~
29984 \begin_layout Section
29985 Table of Contents and other Listings
29986 \begin_inset Index idx
29989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29996 \begin_inset Index idx
29999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30000 Navigating ! Outline
30006 \begin_inset Index idx
30009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30025 \begin_layout Subsection
30027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30029 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30036 \begin_layout Standard
30037 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30040 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30046 \begin_inset space ~
30052 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30054 If you click on it, the
30058 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30059 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30060 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30062 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30064 \begin_inset space ~
30069 that is described in section
30070 \begin_inset space ~
30074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30076 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30083 \begin_layout Standard
30084 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30085 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30087 \begin_inset space ~
30091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30093 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30097 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30105 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30109 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30111 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30114 \begin_layout Subsection
30115 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30118 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30125 \begin_layout Standard
30126 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30128 You can insert them via the
30130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30131 List/Contents/References
30134 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30137 \begin_layout Section
30138 URLs and Hyperlinks
30139 \begin_inset Index idx
30142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30149 \begin_inset Index idx
30152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30161 \begin_layout Subsection
30163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30172 \begin_layout Standard
30173 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30181 \begin_layout Standard
30182 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30184 \begin_inset Flex URL
30187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30189 https://www.lyx.org
30197 \begin_layout Standard
30198 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30204 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30208 \begin_layout Standard
30209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30217 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30226 \begin_layout Subsection
30228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30230 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30237 \begin_layout Standard
30238 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30243 or with the toolbar button
30250 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30259 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30260 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30263 name "LyX's homepage"
30264 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30269 , an Email address like this:
30270 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30272 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30273 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30279 , or a link to a file.
30284 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30292 \begin_layout Standard
30293 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30306 to the link target.
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30310 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30311 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30312 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30313 the text style dialog.
30314 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30318 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30320 name "LyX's homepage"
30321 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30329 \begin_layout Standard
30330 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30334 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30337 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30341 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30343 \begin_inset Newline newline
30351 \begin_inset Newline newline
30358 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30359 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30363 \begin_layout Section
30365 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30367 \begin_inset Index idx
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30379 name "sec:Counters"
30386 \begin_layout Standard
30388 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30389 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30390 is its ability to manage counters.
30391 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30392 modify counters directly.
30393 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30395 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30396 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30397 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30398 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30399 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30403 \begin_layout Standard
30405 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30406 There are five commands you can use:
30409 \begin_layout Enumerate
30411 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30412 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30415 \begin_layout Enumerate
30417 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30418 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30419 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30422 \begin_layout Enumerate
30424 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30425 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30428 \begin_layout Enumerate
30430 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30431 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30435 \begin_layout Enumerate
30437 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30438 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30441 \begin_layout Standard
30443 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30444 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30445 those that are available in the current document class.
30450 \begin_layout Section
30452 \begin_inset Index idx
30455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30464 name "sec:Appendices"
30471 \begin_layout Standard
30472 Appendices are created with the menu
30474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30476 \begin_inset space ~
30480 \begin_inset space ~
30486 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30487 as the appendix part of the book.
30488 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30493 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30494 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30495 and the subsection number.
30496 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30502 \begin_inset space ~
30506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30508 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30516 \begin_inset space ~
30520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30522 reference "subsec:Export"
30529 \begin_layout Section
30531 \begin_inset Index idx
30534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30543 name "sec:Bibliography"
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30551 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30553 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30554 \begin_inset space ~
30558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30560 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30567 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30572 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30573 \begin_inset space ~
30577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30579 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30584 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30585 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30586 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30590 using a bibliography database.
30593 \begin_layout Standard
30594 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30595 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30599 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30600 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30601 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30602 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30603 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30606 \begin_layout Subsection
30607 The Bibliography Environment
30608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30610 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30617 \begin_layout Standard
30622 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30624 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30633 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30635 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30636 of ASCII characters only.
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30642 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30645 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30651 \begin_inset Newline newline
30655 \begin_inset Flex URL
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30660 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30670 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30680 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30681 \begin_inset Newline newline
30688 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30689 the number of the entry.
30694 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30703 \begin_layout Standard
30704 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30709 or the toolbar button
30712 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30716 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30717 containing the available citations.
30718 Select one or more keys from the list and
30728 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30729 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30733 \begin_layout Standard
30734 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30735 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30736 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30752 Companion Second Edition
30755 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30757 key "latexcompanion"
30765 \begin_layout Standard
30766 The \SpecialChar LyX
30767 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30786 \begin_inset Index idx
30789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30798 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30799 the label needs to be given the form
30800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30811 Author A and Author B(Year)
30812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30819 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30826 \begin_inset space ~
30831 in the document settings
30832 \begin_inset Index idx
30835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30836 Document ! Settings
30843 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30845 \begin_inset space ~
30851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30853 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30861 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30863 Once you have done that, the
30867 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30884 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30885 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30886 These two are madatory.
30887 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30890 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30892 ) and in abrreviated form (
30899 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30900 add the abbreviated form to
30904 and the full list to the optional
30912 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30913 If specified like this,
30915 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30916 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30926 is specified, toggling
30927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30934 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30935 full and abbreviated list
30939 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30940 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30941 the citation references.
30942 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30948 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30951 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30953 \begin_inset space ~
30961 arg "layout-paragraph"
30965 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30968 \begin_layout Subsection
30969 Bibliography databases
30970 \begin_inset Index idx
30973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30974 Bibliography ! Databases
30980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30982 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30989 \begin_layout Standard
30990 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30998 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30999 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31004 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31006 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31007 your working field in a database.
31008 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31009 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31010 list for that document.
31011 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31015 \begin_layout Standard
31016 The database is a text file with the file extension
31017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31028 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31029 The format is explained in
31030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31037 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31041 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31047 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31048 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31049 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31051 \begin_inset Flex URL
31054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31056 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31064 \begin_layout Standard
31066 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31067 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31068 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31070 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31072 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31073 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31074 Those are addressed by
31079 \begin_inset Index idx
31082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31084 packages ! biblatex
31090 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31091 (although it has been significantly
31092 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31102 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31103 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31104 might conversely fail to correctly
31105 handle databases that use specific
31114 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31118 \begin_layout Standard
31119 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31124 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31130 \begin_inset Index idx
31133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31134 Document ! Settings
31146 \begin_inset space ~
31151 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31160 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31162 \begin_inset Index idx
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31175 \begin_layout Standard
31176 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31180 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31182 \begin_inset space ~
31188 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31189 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31197 Add bibliography to TOC
31199 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31204 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31205 in the document or just the cited references.
31207 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31212 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31213 differ from the encoding of the document.
31218 \begin_layout Standard
31219 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31220 style file is a text file with the file extension
31221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31232 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31233 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31234 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31235 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31237 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31243 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31244 \begin_inset Newline newline
31248 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31250 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31260 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31265 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31269 \begin_layout Standard
31270 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31275 \begin_inset Index idx
31278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31279 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31285 \begin_inset Index idx
31288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31290 packages ! biblatex
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31299 Accessing a database via
31303 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31307 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31309 \begin_inset space ~
31315 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31316 you cannot select a
31321 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31325 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31328 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31329 As for the styles, note the following.
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31339 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31352 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31353 file (text file with the file extension
31354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31365 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31366 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31368 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31377 styles are not set in the
31380 \begin_inset space ~
31385 dialog, but in the document settings.
31386 \begin_inset Index idx
31389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31390 Document ! Settings
31395 However, in the dialog in the
31399 field, which is only visible if you use
31403 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31404 example how its heading will appear).
31405 These options are described in detail in the
31410 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31420 \begin_layout Standard
31421 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31422 \begin_inset space ~
31426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31428 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31439 Bibliography Processors
31442 \begin_layout Standard
31443 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31444 uses a bibliography processor,
31445 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31446 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31447 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31449 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31450 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31453 \begin_layout Standard
31454 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31456 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31457 You can do this on a general level in
31459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31461 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31464 or for individual documents in
31466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31467 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31471 The following variants are available by default:
31474 \begin_layout Description
31475 biber a specific, modern processor
31476 \begin_inset Index idx
31479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31486 developed exclusively for
31490 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31496 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31501 makes use of; if you use the
31505 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31512 \begin_layout Description
31513 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31514 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31515 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31519 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31522 \begin_layout Description
31523 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31524 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31528 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31532 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31536 features are supported.
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31540 By default (with the
31546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31547 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31560 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31561 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31562 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31565 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31566 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31579 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31580 -based bibliography styles).
31581 This should suit most needs.
31584 \begin_layout Standard
31585 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31586 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31587 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31592 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31593 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31594 You can adjust it in
31596 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31597 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31598 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31604 \begin_layout Standard
31605 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31606 can add below the selection.
31607 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31608 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31614 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31628 \begin_layout Standard
31630 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31632 These are explained in detail in section
31634 Customizing Bibliographies
31638 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31643 Additional Features
31646 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31650 \begin_layout Subsection
31652 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273424
31653 Bibliography entries allowing external view of the cited material
31656 \begin_layout Standard
31658 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273449
31660 supports viewing the material the selected citation points to – though
31661 you need to satisfy some conditions so the
31664 \begin_inset space ~
31668 \begin_inset space ~
31673 in the context menu of the citation inset is active and working.
31676 \begin_layout Standard
31678 \change_inserted 5863208 1598270259
31679 There are several ways how to make this feature available:
31682 \begin_layout Itemize
31684 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273631
31685 Have citations entries including any of the following fields:
31686 \begin_inset Flex Code
31689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31691 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273574
31700 \begin_inset Flex Code
31703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31705 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273595
31714 \begin_inset Flex Code
31717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31719 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273611
31727 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
31728 \begin_inset Flex Code
31731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31733 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273631
31742 This will launch web browser with the appropriate link.
31745 \begin_layout Itemize
31747 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273665
31748 Having fields pointing to local files on your disk:
31749 \begin_inset Flex Code
31752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31754 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273656
31762 (filled by JabRef),
31763 \begin_inset Flex Code
31766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31768 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273665
31776 (filled by KBibTeX).
31777 This will launch appropriate file viewer.
31778 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
31783 \begin_layout Itemize
31785 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273865
31786 Supplying your own script named either
31787 \begin_inset Flex Code
31790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31792 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273683
31801 \begin_inset Flex Code
31804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273697
31814 , which takes year and first author name as an input.
31815 It will be responsibility of this script to search for the appropriate
31816 file on your disk and launch the viewer.
31817 This script needs to be found among other executables so
31819 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31823 Example templates with identical names can be found within your installation.
31828 \begin_layout Subsection
31830 \begin_inset Index idx
31833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31834 Bibliography ! Citation format
31840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31842 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31849 \begin_layout Standard
31850 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31855 \begin_inset space \space{}
31858 numerical citation (as
31859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31866 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31874 ) or author-year citations (as
31875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31884 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31889 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31897 \begin_inset Index idx
31900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31901 Document ! Settings
31906 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31912 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31913 labels, is there to use
31916 \begin_inset space ~
31927 \begin_inset space ~
31932 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31935 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31943 With a bibliography database (see
31944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31946 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31953 ) one has in contrary to the
31957 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31958 These style formats are available:
31961 \begin_layout Description
31963 \begin_inset space ~
31966 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31967 -based approached without any additional packages
31968 (simple numeric citations).
31971 \begin_layout Description
31972 Biblatex loads the package
31977 \begin_inset Index idx
31980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31982 packages ! biblatex
31987 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31989 Biblatex citation style
31993 Biblatex bibliography style
31996 Options to the package
32000 can be entered in the
32007 \begin_layout Description
32009 \begin_inset space ~
32013 \begin_inset space ~
32016 mode) loads the package
32020 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32021 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32033 behavior very closely.
32038 this option has some additional styles.
32043 styles are also supported by this variant.
32046 \begin_layout Description
32048 \begin_inset space ~
32051 (BibTeX) loads the package
32056 \begin_inset Index idx
32059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32066 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32069 \begin_layout Description
32071 \begin_inset space ~
32074 (BibTeX) loads the package
32079 \begin_inset Index idx
32082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32089 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32092 \begin_layout Standard
32101 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32103 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32112 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32114 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32115 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32117 Biblatex citation style
32120 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32126 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32130 \begin_layout Standard
32131 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32132 are available in the
32137 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32138 a name prefix such as
32139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32154 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32159 \begin_inset space \space{}
32163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32181 \begin_inset space \space{}
32184 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32190 \begin_inset space \space{}
32194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32206 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32210 \begin_inset space ~
32218 \begin_inset space ~
32224 Here is a simple example where the text
32225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32229 \begin_inset space ~
32233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32236 appears after the reference:
32239 \begin_layout Quote
32241 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32244 key "latexcompanion"
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32253 All styles except for
32257 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32267 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32271 \begin_layout Standard
32272 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32273 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32274 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32279 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32280 multi-citation (so-called
32281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32284 qualified citation lists
32285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32291 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32296 dialog will display three columns in the field
32303 \begin_inset space ~
32311 \begin_inset space ~
32319 \begin_inset space ~
32325 If you double-click on an item's
32328 \begin_inset space ~
32336 \begin_inset space ~
32341 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32344 General text before
32350 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32353 \begin_layout Section
32355 \begin_inset Index idx
32358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32374 \begin_layout Standard
32375 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32379 \begin_inset space ~
32384 or the toolbar button
32391 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32392 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32393 by \SpecialChar LyX
32394 as the index entry.
32397 \begin_layout Standard
32398 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32401 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32403 \begin_inset space ~
32409 A light blue box labeled
32410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32421 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32422 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32427 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32428 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32429 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32430 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32432 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32434 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32442 \begin_layout Subsection
32443 Grouping Index Entries
32444 \begin_inset Index idx
32447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32456 \begin_layout Standard
32457 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32459 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32460 lists under the entry
32461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32469 First we create the entry
32470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32478 \begin_inset space ~
32482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32484 reference "subsec:Lists"
32489 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32490 \begin_inset space ~
32494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32496 reference "sec:Itemize"
32500 , we insert the command
32503 \begin_layout Standard
32509 \begin_layout Standard
32513 \begin_layout Standard
32519 \begin_layout Standard
32520 for the enumerated list in section
32521 \begin_inset space ~
32525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32527 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32535 The exclamation mark
32536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32543 marks the grouping levels.
32544 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32545 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32546 If we don't have an index entry for
32547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32554 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32557 \begin_layout Subsection
32559 \begin_inset Index idx
32562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32563 Index ! Page ranges
32571 \begin_layout Standard
32572 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32574 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32575 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32576 an index entry in section
32577 \begin_inset space ~
32581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32583 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32590 \begin_layout Standard
32593 Paragraph environments|(
32596 \begin_layout Standard
32597 and another entry at the end of section
32598 \begin_inset space ~
32602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32604 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32614 Paragraph environments|)
32617 \begin_layout Standard
32619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32642 respectively start and end the index range.
32643 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32644 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32645 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32646 An example is the index entry
32647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32650 Document ! Settings
32651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32657 \begin_layout Subsection
32659 \begin_inset Index idx
32662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32663 Index ! Cross referencing
32671 \begin_layout Standard
32672 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32673 We referred for example in the index entry
32674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32682 \begin_inset space ~
32686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32688 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32692 ) to the index entry
32693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32700 in the same section using the entry
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32706 GIF|see{Image formats}
32709 \begin_layout Standard
32710 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32712 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32713 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32716 \begin_layout Subsection
32718 \begin_inset Index idx
32721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32722 Index ! Entry order
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32731 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32732 follow the rules for the index order.
32733 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32739 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32741 \begin_inset space ~
32745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32747 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32756 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32757 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32782 \begin_inset Index idx
32785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32786 Dummy entries ! maïs
32792 \begin_inset Index idx
32795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32796 Dummy entries ! maître
32802 \begin_inset Index idx
32805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32806 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32811 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32812 maïs, maison, maître.
32813 To achieve this, we use the command
32816 \begin_layout Standard
32819 previous entry@current entry
32822 \begin_layout Standard
32823 In our case we want to have
32824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32839 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32848 \begin_layout Standard
32849 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32850 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32852 See the next subsection for an example.
32855 \begin_layout Subsection
32857 \begin_inset Index idx
32860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32861 Index ! Entry layout
32869 \begin_layout Standard
32870 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32871 \begin_inset Index idx
32874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32877 This is an italic dummy entry
32882 You can also format the page number using the character
32883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32890 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32891 -command without a backslash.
32892 We can write for example
32895 \begin_layout Standard
32898 italic page number:|textit
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32902 to get the page number in italic.
32903 \begin_inset Index idx
32906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32907 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32912 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32913 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32931 \begin_inset space ~
32937 Have a look at section
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32944 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32948 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32952 \begin_layout Standard
32953 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32961 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32965 to generate the index, see section
32966 \begin_inset space ~
32970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32972 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32981 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32986 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32987 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32990 key "latexcompanion"
33003 \begin_layout Standard
33004 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33006 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33007 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33008 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33009 If so, put the following in the preamble
33012 \begin_layout Standard
33024 \begin_layout Standard
33028 \begin_layout Standard
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 in the index entry.
33036 \begin_inset Index idx
33039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33040 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33045 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33046 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33047 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33050 \begin_layout Standard
33051 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33052 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33053 a bold font for all index entries.
33054 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33066 documentation for details,
33067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33069 key "makeindex,xindy"
33077 \begin_layout Subsection
33079 \begin_inset Index idx
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33091 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33098 \begin_layout Standard
33099 If the index generation program
33103 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33104 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33108 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33109 distribution, is used.
33113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33118 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33119 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33120 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33121 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33122 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33132 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33134 dialog, see section
33135 \begin_inset space ~
33139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33141 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33146 The available options are listed and explained in
33147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33149 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33155 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33159 \begin_layout Standard
33160 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33161 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33165 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33169 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33170 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33173 \begin_layout Subsection
33177 \begin_layout Standard
33178 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33179 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33187 next to the standard index.
33189 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33190 that add this feature.
33197 \begin_inset Index idx
33200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 packages ! splitidx
33207 package to generate multiple indexes.
33208 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33214 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33216 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33224 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33225 style, but it also includes
33226 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33227 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33235 \begin_layout Standard
33236 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33237 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33243 and select the option
33245 Use multiple Indexes
33252 already contains the standard index
33253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33261 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33262 also appear as a heading) to the
33266 input field and press the
33271 The new index now also appears in the list.
33272 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33273 label color to the new index.
33276 \begin_layout Standard
33277 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33281 List/Contents/References
33287 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33288 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33289 are additional features:
33292 \begin_layout Itemize
33293 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33294 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33297 \begin_layout Itemize
33298 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33299 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33304 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33305 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33306 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33307 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33310 \begin_layout Itemize
33315 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33316 code in the name of the index.
33319 \begin_layout Section
33320 Nomenclature/Glossary
33321 \begin_inset Index idx
33324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33331 \begin_inset Index idx
33334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33365 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33372 \begin_layout Standard
33373 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33374 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33375 called nomenclature or glossary.
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33379 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33386 \begin_inset Index idx
33389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33397 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33406 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33410 \begin_layout Standard
33411 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33412 and then use the menu
33414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33420 \begin_inset space ~
33425 or the toolbar button
33428 arg "nomencl-insert"
33433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33444 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33447 \begin_layout Standard
33448 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33449 The first is the term or
33453 that you wish to define.
33458 of the term or symbol.
33461 \begin_layout Standard
33462 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33470 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33471 code for nomenclature entries the option
33475 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33483 \begin_layout Subsection
33484 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33485 \begin_inset Index idx
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33489 Nomenclature ! Layout
33497 \begin_layout Standard
33498 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33502 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33509 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33517 \begin_inset Newline newline
33525 \begin_inset Newline newline
33531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33538 character starts/ends the formula.
33539 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33540 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33552 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33562 \begin_layout Standard
33563 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33564 syntax is given in section
33565 \begin_inset space ~
33569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33571 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33578 \begin_layout Standard
33582 \begin_inset space ~
33587 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33589 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33594 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33601 in this document is:
33602 \begin_inset Newline newline
33607 dummy entry for the character
33612 \begin_inset Newline newline
33624 \begin_inset space ~
33634 font use the command
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33669 \begin_inset space \space{}
33673 \begin_inset Newline newline
33689 \begin_inset Newline newline
33692 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33693 This command will make the font of all symbols
33700 \begin_inset space ~
33708 \begin_layout Standard
33709 If the characters |
33710 \begin_inset space \space{}
33714 \begin_inset space \space{}
33718 \begin_inset space \space{}
33722 \begin_inset space \space{}
33726 \begin_inset space \space{}
33729 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33730 code they need to be escaped
33731 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33732 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33733 LatexCommand nomenclature
33734 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33735 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33743 \begin_layout Subsection
33744 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33745 \begin_inset Index idx
33748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33759 -code of the symbol
33761 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33763 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33766 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33767 LatexCommand nomenclature
33769 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33777 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33781 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33782 LatexCommand nomenclature
33785 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33791 They will be sorted by
33792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33818 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33821 will be sorted before the
33825 since the character
33826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33833 is considered in sorting.
33836 \begin_layout Standard
33837 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33840 \begin_inset space ~
33845 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33846 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33848 For the example given, you can insert
33852 in this field for the
33853 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33860 will be located before
33861 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33883 \begin_layout Subsection
33884 Nomenclature Options
33885 \begin_inset Index idx
33888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33889 Nomenclature ! Options
33895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33897 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33904 \begin_layout Standard
33909 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33910 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33913 \begin_layout Description
33914 refeq Appends the phrase
33915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33930 to every nomenclature entry, where
33936 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33939 \begin_layout Description
33940 refpage Appends the phrase
33941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33956 to every nomenclature entry, where
33962 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33965 \begin_layout Description
33966 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33969 \begin_layout Standard
33970 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33971 class options list in the
33973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33977 In this document the options
33984 \begin_layout Standard
33985 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33991 \begin_layout Standard
33992 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33993 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33998 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34001 \begin_layout Description
34011 \begin_layout Description
34014 nomrefpage Like the
34021 \begin_layout Description
34024 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34033 \begin_layout Description
34037 \begin_inset space ~
34043 \begin_inset space ~
34048 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34051 \begin_layout Standard
34053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34060 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34061 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34074 \begin_inset Newline newline
34080 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34084 \begin_inset space ~
34096 unskip, see equation
34099 \begin_inset Newline newline
34106 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34107 \begin_inset Newline newline
34113 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34135 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34138 \begin_inset space ~
34143 in the document settings under
34146 \begin_inset space ~
34154 \begin_layout Standard
34162 \begin_inset Newline newline
34166 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34170 \begin_inset space ~
34182 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34184 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34185 \begin_inset Newline newline
34192 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34193 \begin_inset Newline newline
34197 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34213 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34218 \begin_layout Subsection
34219 Printing the Nomenclature
34220 \begin_inset Index idx
34223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34224 Nomenclature ! Printing
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34233 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34236 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34252 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34253 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34254 You can choose between these settings:
34257 \begin_layout Description
34258 Default a space of 1
34259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34265 \begin_layout Description
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34271 \begin_inset space ~
34274 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34277 \begin_layout Description
34278 Custom custom space
34281 \begin_layout Standard
34282 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34291 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34299 For example, in order to change the name to
34303 , add the following line to the preamble:
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34319 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34322 \begin_layout Standard
34323 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34324 \begin_inset Newline newline
34339 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34342 \begin_layout Subsection
34343 Nomenclature Program
34344 \begin_inset Index idx
34347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34348 Nomenclature ! Program
34354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34356 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34369 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34370 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34372 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34377 by adding options, see section
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34384 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34389 The available options are listed and explained in
34390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34392 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34400 \begin_layout Section
34402 \begin_inset Index idx
34405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34412 \begin_inset Index idx
34415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34416 Document ! Branches
34422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34424 name "sec:Branches"
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34433 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34434 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34435 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34438 \begin_layout Standard
34439 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34440 allows you to put text into branches.
34441 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34442 To create a branch, either select the menu
34444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34445 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34448 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34457 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34458 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34459 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34460 and whether the name of the branch should
34461 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34462 (see below for an example).
34463 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34464 to the name of the other) and to add
34465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34477 \begin_inset space ~
34480 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34481 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34486 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34491 where you can choose a branch.
34492 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34498 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34501 \begin_layout Standard
34502 \begin_inset Branch Question
34506 \begin_layout Standard
34511 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34519 \begin_layout Standard
34520 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34524 \begin_layout Standard
34529 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34537 \begin_layout Standard
34544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34548 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34549 Consider for example a file
34550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34557 which has the above branches.
34559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34566 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34590 branch were inactive,
34591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34606 branch was active, likewise
34607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34622 branch was active, and
34623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34626 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34630 if both branches were active.
34631 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34632 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34638 \begin_layout Standard
34639 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34645 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34646 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34650 \begin_inset space ~
34658 \begin_layout Standard
34659 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34676 branch is deactivated.
34682 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34688 \begin_layout Standard
34689 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34690 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34691 definitions for each branch.
34692 For example you can define for the question branch
34696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34697 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34698 -syntax, see section
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34705 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34717 \begin_layout Standard
34727 \begin_layout Standard
34737 \begin_layout Standard
34738 and for the answer branch
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34751 \begin_layout Standard
34761 \begin_layout Standard
34762 \begin_inset Branch Question
34766 \begin_layout Standard
34770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34798 \begin_layout Standard
34799 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34803 \begin_layout Standard
34807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34835 \begin_layout Standard
34836 Now it is possible to use the
34840 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34847 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34850 commands to obtain conditional output.
34851 Here is an example formula where only the
34858 \begin_inset Formula
34860 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34868 \begin_layout Standard
34869 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34877 \begin_layout Standard
34878 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34884 \begin_inset space \space{}
34887 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34889 For this advanced usage, see the
34895 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34900 \begin_layout Section
34902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34904 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34909 \begin_inset Index idx
34912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34921 \begin_layout Standard
34924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34925 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34928 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34930 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34936 \begin_inset Index idx
34939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34941 packages ! hyperref
34946 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34947 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34948 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34949 part of the document.
34953 \begin_layout Standard
34954 The header information in the dialog tab
34958 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34959 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34960 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34961 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34965 \begin_inset space ~
34969 \begin_inset space ~
34974 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34975 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34976 and author entries.
34980 \begin_inset space ~
34984 \begin_inset space ~
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34993 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34996 \begin_layout Standard
34997 You can specify in the dialog tab
35001 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35006 \begin_inset space ~
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35014 \begin_inset space ~
35019 option allows long links to be split;
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35043 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35046 \begin_inset space ~
35051 colors the different links.
35052 The default colors are:
35055 \begin_layout Labeling
35056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35061 for hyperlinks and URLs
35064 \begin_layout Labeling
35065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35073 \begin_layout Labeling
35074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35082 \begin_layout Standard
35083 but you can change these in the field
35088 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35091 \begin_layout Standard
35094 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35097 \begin_layout Standard
35102 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35103 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35104 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35107 \begin_layout Standard
35112 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35113 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35114 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35124 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35125 when opening the PDF.
35127 \begin_inset space ~
35130 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35131 \begin_inset space ~
35134 1 will only display the sections.
35137 \begin_layout Standard
35138 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35139 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35145 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35156 \begin_layout Section
35158 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35162 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35169 \begin_layout Subsection
35172 \begin_inset Index idx
35175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35185 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35192 \begin_layout Standard
35193 As \SpecialChar LyX
35194 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35195 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35196 commands and constructs,
35199 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35200 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35201 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35202 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35203 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35204 cannot support all packages and
35208 \begin_layout Standard
35209 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35210 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35211 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35215 Code box is created by the menu
35217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35219 \begin_inset space ~
35224 or by the toolbar button
35237 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35245 \begin_layout Standard
35246 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35248 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35250 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35255 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35260 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35267 , you can write the command part
35273 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35274 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35278 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35279 Code box behind the word.
35280 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35281 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35285 \begin_layout Standard
35286 \begin_inset Graphics
35287 filename clipart/ERT.png
35295 \begin_layout Standard
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35300 This is a line with a
35304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35336 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35337 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35338 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35339 know that the command is finished.
35347 \begin_layout Subsection
35348 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35350 \begin_inset Argument 1
35353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35354 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35361 \begin_inset Index idx
35364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35374 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35381 \begin_layout Standard
35382 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35383 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35384 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35385 uses in the background.
35386 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35387 is based on commands, you can
35388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35396 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35397 any time if you know the right commands.
35398 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35399 is the end of the day.
35400 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35401 all caption labels bold.
35402 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35404 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35409 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35411 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35413 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35426 \begin_layout Standard
35427 As result you find that the package
35432 \begin_inset Index idx
35435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35443 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35448 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35460 \begin_layout Standard
35465 usepackage[options]{package name}
35468 \begin_layout Standard
35469 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35470 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35471 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35472 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35475 \begin_layout Standard
35476 In your case the package name is
35481 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35486 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35487 So you add the command
35490 \begin_layout Standard
35495 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35499 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35504 For more commands provided by the
35508 package, have a look at its documentation,
35509 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35524 \begin_layout Standard
35525 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35527 For example if you use a
35531 class, you don't need the package
35535 , you can instead write
35538 \begin_layout Standard
35543 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35548 \begin_layout Standard
35549 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35550 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35551 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35558 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35562 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35563 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35565 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35566 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35567 Code box as described in the previous
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35573 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35578 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35586 \begin_layout Standard
35587 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35593 \begin_layout Standard
35597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35607 \begin_inset Note Note
35610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35611 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35619 \begin_layout Left Header
35620 \begin_inset Argument 1
35623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 \begin_inset Note Note
35646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35647 defines the header line as described below
35655 \begin_layout Center Header
35656 \begin_inset Argument 1
35659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35668 \begin_layout Right Header
35669 \begin_inset Argument 1
35672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35693 \begin_layout Left Footer
35694 \begin_inset Argument 1
35697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35718 \begin_layout Center Footer
35719 \begin_inset Argument 1
35722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35734 \begin_inset Newline newline
35738 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35744 \begin_layout Right Footer
35745 \begin_inset Argument 1
35748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35770 \begin_layout Section
35771 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35774 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35779 \begin_inset Index idx
35782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35783 Document ! Header/Footer line
35789 \begin_inset Index idx
35792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35801 \begin_layout Standard
35802 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35823 \begin_inset space ~
35829 As a second step add in the menu
35831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35832 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35841 Custom Header/Footerlines
35844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35848 This module offers the following 6
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35855 \begin_layout Description
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35861 \begin_inset space ~
35865 \begin_inset space ~
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35879 \begin_layout Description
35881 \begin_inset space ~
35885 \begin_inset space ~
35889 \begin_inset space ~
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35897 \begin_inset space ~
35903 \begin_layout Standard
35904 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35905 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35908 \begin_layout Standard
35909 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35910 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35918 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35922 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35925 \begin_layout Standard
35926 \begin_inset Float figure
35933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35936 \begin_inset Tabular
35937 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35938 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35939 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35941 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35961 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35972 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35990 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36001 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36005 The normal text on the page goes here.
36006 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36008 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36009 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36014 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36023 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36052 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36063 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36081 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36099 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36104 name "fig:Page-layout"
36108 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36121 \begin_layout Standard
36122 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36130 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36139 is set to “Default”.
36140 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36149 \begin_layout Subsection
36153 \begin_layout Standard
36154 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36155 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36156 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36157 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36159 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36161 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36164 \begin_layout Standard
36165 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36166 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36172 \begin_inset space ~
36180 \begin_layout Description
36183 thepage prints the current page number
36186 \begin_layout Description
36189 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36192 \begin_layout Description
36195 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36198 \begin_layout Description
36201 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36202 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36209 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36212 because it usually goes in a left header.
36215 \begin_layout Description
36218 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36219 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36221 It is normally used in the right header.
36224 \begin_layout Subsection
36225 Default header/footer
36228 \begin_layout Standard
36229 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36230 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36231 footer has the page number.
36232 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36233 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36234 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36237 \begin_inset space ~
36245 \begin_layout Subsection
36249 \begin_layout Standard
36250 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36251 Some pages are different.
36252 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36253 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36254 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36255 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36256 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36260 Header and footer decoration line
36263 \begin_layout Standard
36264 By default, you get a 0.4
36265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36268 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36269 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36281 in the following way:
36284 \begin_layout Standard
36291 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36294 \begin_layout Standard
36295 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36308 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36315 \begin_layout Standard
36316 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36318 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36334 Several header/footer lines
36337 \begin_layout Standard
36338 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36339 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36340 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36342 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36358 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36368 \begin_layout Standard
36375 headheight}{height}
36378 \begin_layout Standard
36383 is a size in standard units (e.
36384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36388 \begin_inset space \space{}
36396 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36397 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36398 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36399 logfile with the menu
36401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36411 \begin_inset space ~
36416 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36421 \begin_inset Index idx
36424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36426 packages ! fancyhdr
36432 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36433 for your header/footer.
36436 \begin_layout Subsection
36440 \begin_layout Standard
36441 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36442 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36443 This example consists of the following definition:
36446 \begin_layout Description
36448 \begin_inset space ~
36457 , empty optional argument
36460 \begin_layout Description
36462 \begin_inset space ~
36465 Header empty, empty optional argument
36468 \begin_layout Description
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36479 in the optional argument
36482 \begin_layout Description
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36493 in the optional argument
36496 \begin_layout Description
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36515 \begin_inset Newline newline
36519 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36526 in the optional argument
36529 \begin_layout Description
36531 \begin_inset space ~
36540 , empty optional argument
36543 \begin_layout Description
36546 headrulewidth set to 2
36547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36554 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36555 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36561 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36571 \begin_layout Standard
36572 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36578 \begin_layout Standard
36582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36586 pagestyle{headings}
36592 \begin_inset Note Note
36595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36596 switches back to page style with the default headings
36604 \begin_layout Section
36605 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36608 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36613 \begin_inset Index idx
36616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36623 \begin_inset Index idx
36626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36635 \begin_layout Standard
36637 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36638 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36639 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36642 \begin_layout Subsection
36646 \begin_layout Standard
36647 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36653 \begin_inset Index idx
36656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36658 packages ! preview-latex
36663 (on some systems named simply
36668 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36670 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36677 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36679 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36687 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36688 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36689 -package are automatically
36690 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36694 \begin_layout Subsection
36698 \begin_layout Standard
36699 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36700 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36702 activate the option
36705 \begin_inset space ~
36712 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36725 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36732 \begin_inset space ~
36745 \begin_inset space ~
36750 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36753 \begin_layout Standard
36754 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36759 \begin_inset space ~
36767 \begin_inset space ~
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36777 and when you finish
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36790 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36791 generated by activating the option
36794 \begin_inset space ~
36800 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36808 \begin_layout Subsection
36809 Selected document parts
36812 \begin_layout Standard
36813 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36814 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36815 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36816 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36818 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36824 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36825 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36826 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36829 \begin_layout Standard
36830 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36837 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36849 is explained in section
36851 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36866 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36867 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36868 the final rotated boxes,
36869 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36870 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36872 Here is the result:
36875 \begin_layout Standard
36876 \begin_inset Preview
36878 \begin_layout Standard
36883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36887 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36893 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36903 height_special "totalheight"
36908 backgroundcolor "none"
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36936 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36942 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36964 \begin_layout Standard
36965 Previewing works also for colors.
36966 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36985 is explained in section
36992 \begin_inset space ~
37005 \begin_layout Standard
37006 \begin_inset Preview
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37031 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37036 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37055 \begin_layout Standard
37056 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37062 \begin_layout Standard
37063 If \SpecialChar LyX
37064 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37065 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37066 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37067 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37068 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37069 the \SpecialChar TeX
37071 If \SpecialChar LyX
37072 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37073 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37075 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37076 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37077 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37080 \begin_layout Subsection
37085 \begin_layout Standard
37086 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37087 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37090 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37097 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37099 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37101 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37102 's main window, then only this selection
37103 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37104 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37105 the source view window.
37110 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37111 ; but note that if you have
37112 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37114 not just the one which is open at the time.
37117 \begin_layout Section
37118 Advanced Find and Replace
37119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37121 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37126 \begin_inset Index idx
37129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37136 \begin_inset Index idx
37139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37153 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37154 allows for searching of complex,
37155 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37157 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37158 The key-features are:
37161 \begin_layout Itemize
37162 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37163 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37164 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37168 \begin_layout Itemize
37169 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37170 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37171 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37172 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37175 \begin_layout Itemize
37176 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37177 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37178 outside of mathematics environments
37181 \begin_layout Itemize
37182 Search may be widened to a specific
37187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37194 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37195 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37202 \begin_layout Itemize
37203 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37204 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37209 \begin_inset space ~
37212 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37215 \begin_layout Subsection
37219 \begin_layout Standard
37220 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37222 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37235 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37238 ) or the toolbar button
37241 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37247 Advanced Find and Replace
37252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37256 \begin_layout Standard
37262 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37271 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37274 arg "paragraph-break"
37278 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37279 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37283 arg "paragraph-break"
37286 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37290 searches backwards.
37293 \begin_layout Standard
37297 \begin_inset space ~
37302 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37311 \begin_inset space ~
37316 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37320 Searching for mathematics
37323 \begin_layout Standard
37324 Mathematical formulas, such as
37325 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37328 or something more complex like
37329 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37332 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37337 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37338 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37339 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37340 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37350 \begin_layout Standard
37351 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37352 This is done by switching to the
37356 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37361 This way, entering in the
37368 \begin_layout Itemize
37369 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37370 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37373 \begin_layout Itemize
37374 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37375 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37378 \begin_layout Itemize
37379 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37380 of it only within section headings.
37381 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37382 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37386 \begin_layout Itemize
37387 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37388 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37395 \begin_layout Standard
37396 The entries made in the
37400 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37403 \begin_inset space ~
37409 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37413 button or alternatively press
37416 arg "paragraph-break"
37423 while the cursor is in the
37426 \begin_inset space ~
37434 \begin_layout Standard
37435 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37437 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37441 \begin_layout Itemize
37442 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37443 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37451 with its typewriter version
37452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37466 \begin_layout Itemize
37467 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37473 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37485 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37492 (you may want to enable the
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37508 options and disable the
37516 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37524 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37525 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37529 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37532 , or occurrences of
37533 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37537 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37543 \begin_layout Subsection
37547 \begin_layout Standard
37548 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37553 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37557 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37567 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37573 This is done with the context menu
37575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37576 Insert Regular Expression
37578 while the cursor is in the
37583 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37584 expression matching rules
37588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37589 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37596 \begin_inset space ~
37599 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37600 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37606 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37607 same text in the document.
37608 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37609 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37612 \begin_layout Enumerate
37613 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37618 editor the fraction
37619 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37623 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37626 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37627 fractions with the given denominator.
37630 \begin_layout Enumerate
37631 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37643 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37648 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37649 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37650 Also, by inserting a
37651 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37654 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37655 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37658 \begin_layout Standard
37659 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37660 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37661 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37664 , and referring back to them through
37665 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37669 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37673 For example, try searching with the regexp
37674 \begin_inset Newline newline
37677 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37680 \begin_inset Newline newline
37683 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37686 \begin_layout Standard
37687 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37690 \begin_layout Standard
37691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37699 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37700 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37701 sub-expressions is absolute.
37703 \begin_inset space ~
37707 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37710 always refers to the first occurrence of
37711 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37714 in all entered regexps.
37722 \begin_layout Section
37724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37726 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37731 \begin_inset Index idx
37734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37745 has a built-in spell checker.
37748 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37755 key or the toolbar button
37758 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37761 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37762 beginning of the currently selected text.
37763 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37764 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37765 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37766 scrolled so that it is visible.
37767 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37768 n, if any could be found.
37769 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37773 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37774 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37778 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37785 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37786 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37788 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37789 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37792 \begin_inset space ~
37800 arg "dialog-show character"
37803 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37805 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37808 \begin_layout Standard
37809 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37810 can be downloaded from here:
37811 \begin_inset Newline newline
37815 \begin_inset Flex URL
37818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37820 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37826 \begin_inset Newline newline
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37833 files for each language.
37834 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37835 \begin_inset space ~
37838 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37839 's installation subfolder
37847 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37849 \begin_inset Newline newline
37852 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37853 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37854 but in most cases these are
37870 is the language code.
37873 \begin_layout Subsection
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37880 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37881 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37883 \begin_inset space ~
37886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37889 you can set the following things:
37892 \begin_layout Description
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37897 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37898 should use for spell checking.
37899 Depending on your platform,
37909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37910 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37911 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37929 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37932 \begin_layout Description
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37937 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37938 will always use the given language
37939 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37942 \begin_layout Description
37944 \begin_inset space ~
37947 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37953 \begin_inset space \space{}
37957 This should normally not be needed.
37960 \begin_layout Description
37962 \begin_inset space ~
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37969 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37981 \begin_layout Description
37983 \begin_inset space ~
37986 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37987 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37988 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37989 appear in a context menu.
37990 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37994 \begin_layout Description
37996 \begin_inset space ~
38000 \begin_inset space ~
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38007 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38011 \begin_layout Section
38013 \begin_inset Index idx
38016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38025 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38032 \begin_layout Standard
38034 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38035 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38045 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38047 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38057 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38059 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38060 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38061 which are available for many languages.
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38065 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38066 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38070 \begin_layout Subsection
38071 Setting up the thesaurus
38074 \begin_layout Standard
38083 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38087 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38092 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38098 \begin_inset space ~
38106 For instance, the US English files are named:
38109 \begin_layout Itemize
38113 \begin_layout Itemize
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38126 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38127 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38130 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38131 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38132 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38139 ) to the path where they are installed.
38143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38145 ies, typical locations are
38151 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38155 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38159 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38162 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38168 LibreOffice-<Version>
38175 On the Mac, the default location is
38177 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38178 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38179 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38180 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38181 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38182 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38190 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38191 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38192 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38196 \begin_layout Standard
38197 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38198 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38200 \begin_inset Newline newline
38204 \begin_inset Flex URL
38207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38209 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38217 \begin_layout Standard
38218 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38219 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38221 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38222 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38223 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38225 \begin_inset space ~
38230 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38232 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38233 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38237 \begin_layout Standard
38238 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38240 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38243 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38249 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38252 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38253 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38261 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38262 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38263 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38265 \begin_inset space ~
38270 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38273 \begin_layout Subsection
38274 Using the thesaurus
38277 \begin_layout Standard
38278 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38280 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38283 or the toolbar button
38286 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38289 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38291 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38293 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38294 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38295 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38304 ), related terms (such as
38307 \begin_inset space ~
38316 ), compounds (such as
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38328 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38337 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38340 \begin_layout Standard
38341 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38342 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38346 \begin_layout Standard
38347 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38348 the dictionary, such as the above
38352 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38357 \begin_inset space \space{}
38360 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38361 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38362 For example, looking up the word form
38366 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38371 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38376 \begin_inset space \space{}
38387 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38388 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38389 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38392 \begin_layout Section
38394 \begin_inset Index idx
38397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38404 \begin_inset Index idx
38407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 Document ! Change Tracking
38414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38416 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38423 \begin_layout Standard
38424 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38425 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38426 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38427 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38429 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38431 \begin_inset space ~
38434 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38436 \begin_inset space ~
38444 \begin_layout Standard
38445 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38459 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38460 You can change the color in
38462 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38463 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38465 \begin_inset space ~
38469 \begin_inset space ~
38474 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38480 \begin_inset Index idx
38483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 Color ! Change tracking
38489 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38490 's status bar when the
38491 cursor is in changed text.
38492 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38495 arg "changes-merge"
38501 \begin_layout Standard
38502 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38504 \begin_inset Index idx
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38516 \begin_layout Standard
38517 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38523 \begin_layout Standard
38524 \begin_inset Graphics
38525 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38533 \begin_layout Standard
38534 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38540 \begin_layout Standard
38541 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38544 \begin_layout Standard
38545 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38551 \begin_layout Standard
38552 \begin_inset Tabular
38553 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38554 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38555 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38556 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38566 arg "changes-track"
38574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38585 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 arg "changes-output"
38613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38621 \begin_inset space ~
38624 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38626 \begin_inset space ~
38630 \begin_inset space ~
38634 \begin_inset space ~
38643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38664 Jumps to the next change
38670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38679 arg "change-accept"
38687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38695 \begin_inset space ~
38698 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38700 \begin_inset space ~
38709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 arg "change-reject"
38726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38737 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 arg "changes-merge"
38765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38773 \begin_inset space ~
38776 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38796 arg "all-changes-accept"
38804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38812 \begin_inset space ~
38815 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 arg "all-changes-reject"
38847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38855 \begin_inset space ~
38858 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38860 \begin_inset space ~
38864 \begin_inset space ~
38873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38897 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38899 \begin_inset space ~
38908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38931 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38933 \begin_inset space ~
38949 \begin_layout Standard
38950 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38956 \begin_layout Standard
38957 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38977 \begin_layout Standard
38978 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38979 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38980 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38981 the next change after the current cursor position.
38982 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38983 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38984 step to the next change.
38985 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38988 \begin_layout Standard
38989 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38990 to describe a change.
38993 \begin_layout Standard
38995 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38996 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39002 \begin_inset Index idx
39005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39013 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39022 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39028 \begin_layout Section
39029 Comparison of Documents
39030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39032 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39037 \begin_inset Index idx
39040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39041 Comparison of documents
39049 \begin_layout Standard
39050 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39053 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39057 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39058 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39060 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39062 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39066 \begin_inset space ~
39070 \begin_inset space ~
39074 \begin_inset space ~
39083 \begin_inset space ~
39087 \begin_inset space ~
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39099 \begin_inset space ~
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39108 enables the change tracking option
39111 \begin_inset space ~
39115 \begin_inset space ~
39119 \begin_inset space ~
39124 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39127 \begin_layout Section
39128 International Support
39129 \begin_inset Index idx
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39133 International support
39141 \begin_layout Standard
39142 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39143 with any language you want.
39144 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39145 up \SpecialChar LyX
39147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39149 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39157 \begin_layout Standard
39158 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39159 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39160 \begin_inset space ~
39164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39166 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39173 \begin_layout Subsection
39175 \begin_inset Index idx
39178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39185 \begin_inset Index idx
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39189 Document ! Settings
39195 \begin_inset Index idx
39198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39199 Document ! Language
39207 \begin_layout Standard
39210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39214 dialog lets you set
39216 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39221 \begin_layout Standard
39226 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39236 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39237 For details about the different encoding options see section
39238 \begin_inset space ~
39242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39244 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39251 \begin_layout Subsection
39252 Keyboard mapping configuration
39253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39255 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39262 \begin_layout Standard
39263 If you have for example a U.
39264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39267 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39268 can use an alternate keymap.
39269 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39274 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39275 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39276 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39279 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39280 \begin_inset space ~
39284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39286 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39291 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39292 which one you want to use.
39295 \begin_layout Standard
39296 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39297 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39298 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39302 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39303 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39304 one to support the characters you want.
39305 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39312 \begin_layout Chapter
39315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39317 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39324 \begin_layout Standard
39325 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39326 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39327 topic inside the user's guide.
39330 \begin_layout Section
39332 \begin_inset Index idx
39335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 \begin_layout Standard
39349 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39352 \begin_layout Subsection
39356 \begin_layout Standard
39357 Creates a new document.
39360 \begin_layout Subsection
39364 \begin_layout Standard
39365 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39366 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39367 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39369 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39370 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39376 \begin_layout Subsection
39380 \begin_layout Standard
39384 \begin_layout Subsection
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39389 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39390 Click there on a file to open it.
39393 \begin_layout Subsection
39395 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39399 \begin_layout Standard
39401 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39402 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39406 \begin_layout Subsection
39410 \begin_layout Standard
39411 Closes the current document.
39414 \begin_layout Subsection
39418 \begin_layout Standard
39419 Closes all opened documents.
39422 \begin_layout Subsection
39426 \begin_layout Standard
39427 Saves the actual document.
39430 \begin_layout Subsection
39434 \begin_layout Standard
39435 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39436 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39440 \begin_layout Subsection
39442 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39446 \begin_layout Standard
39448 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39449 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39455 \begin_layout Subsection
39459 \begin_layout Standard
39460 Saves all opened documents.
39463 \begin_layout Subsection
39467 \begin_layout Standard
39468 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39471 \begin_layout Subsection
39475 \begin_layout Standard
39476 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39477 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39478 It is described in the section
39480 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39485 Additional Features
39490 \begin_layout Subsection
39494 \begin_layout Standard
39495 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39496 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39498 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39499 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39503 \begin_layout Standard
39504 When using the menu entry
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39512 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39520 \begin_inset space ~
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39529 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39530 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39533 \begin_layout Subsection
39535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39537 name "subsec:Export"
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39545 You can export your document to various file formats.
39546 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39548 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39549 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39550 during its configuration.
39553 \begin_layout Standard
39554 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39562 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39569 \begin_layout Description
39575 \begin_inset space ~
39578 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39580 \begin_inset space ~
39583 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39584 \begin_inset Newline newline
39587 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39588 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39592 \begin_layout Description
39593 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39599 \begin_layout Description
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39604 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39610 \begin_layout Description
39611 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39612 's native DVI-format.
39613 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39614 files paths or file names in your document.
39616 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39623 \begin_layout Description
39624 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39625 in files paths or file names
39628 \begin_layout Description
39630 \begin_inset space ~
39637 ) DVI-format using the program
39639 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39642 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39646 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39662 \begin_layout Description
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39667 (cropped) the same as
39671 but with cropped page margins.
39674 \begin_layout Description
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39679 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39683 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39688 \begin_layout Description
39692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39700 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39708 \begin_layout Description
39710 \begin_inset space ~
39714 \begin_inset space ~
39717 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39721 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39729 \begin_layout Description
39733 \begin_inset space ~
39742 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39743 source that is compilable with the program
39745 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39749 \begin_layout Description
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39758 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39759 source, additionally all images used in the document
39760 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39764 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39767 \begin_layout Description
39771 \begin_inset space ~
39776 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39777 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39778 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39786 \begin_layout Description
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39799 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39800 source that is compilable with the program
39806 \begin_layout Description
39808 \begin_inset space ~
39812 \begin_inset space ~
39819 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39820 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39826 \begin_layout Description
39828 \begin_inset space ~
39831 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39832 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39838 \begin_inset space \space{}
39843 \begin_inset space ~
39847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39862 represent the version number)
39865 \begin_layout Description
39867 \begin_inset space ~
39871 \begin_inset space ~
39874 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39875 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39876 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39880 \begin_layout Description
39881 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39882 's internal XHTML engine
39885 \begin_layout Description
39887 \begin_inset space ~
39891 \begin_inset space ~
39895 \begin_inset space ~
39899 \begin_inset space ~
39902 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39907 For the conversion the program
39916 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39919 \begin_layout Description
39920 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39925 \begin_layout Description
39927 \begin_inset space ~
39930 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39932 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39935 For the conversion the program
39944 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39947 \begin_layout Description
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39952 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39953 For the conversion the program
39962 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39965 \begin_layout Description
39967 \begin_inset space ~
39970 (cropped) the same as
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39978 but with cropped page margins
39981 \begin_layout Description
39985 \begin_inset space ~
39990 PDF-format using the program
39994 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39997 \begin_layout Description
40001 \begin_inset space ~
40005 \begin_inset space ~
40013 \begin_inset space ~
40018 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40023 \begin_inset space \space{}
40026 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40030 \begin_layout Description
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40039 PDF-format using the program
40041 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40044 , produces PDF-files directly
40047 \begin_layout Description
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40056 PDF-format using the program
40060 , produces PDF-files directly
40063 \begin_layout Description
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40072 PDF-format using the program
40076 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40079 \begin_layout Description
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40088 PDF-format using the program
40093 , produces PDF-files directly
40096 \begin_layout Description
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40108 \begin_layout Description
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40116 \begin_inset space ~
40121 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40122 and then exported as text using the program
40127 \begin_layout Description
40132 PostScript format using the program
40140 options see section
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40147 reference "subsec:General-output"
40154 \begin_layout Description
40155 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40156 source and also code in the statistical programming
40170 it is possible to use
40174 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40178 \begin_layout Standard
40179 If one of the menu entries
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40195 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40197 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40205 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40210 \begin_inset Index idx
40213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40214 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40223 \begin_layout Subsection
40227 \begin_layout Standard
40228 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40229 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40238 reference "sec:Paths"
40243 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40252 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40253 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40254 's preferences as described in section
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40261 reference "subsec:Converters"
40268 \begin_layout Subsection
40269 New and Close Window
40272 \begin_layout Standard
40273 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40277 \begin_layout Subsection
40281 \begin_layout Standard
40282 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40285 \begin_layout Section
40287 \begin_inset Index idx
40290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40299 \begin_layout Subsection
40303 \begin_layout Standard
40304 Described in section
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40311 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40318 \begin_layout Subsection
40319 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40322 \begin_layout Standard
40323 Described in section
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40330 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40337 \begin_layout Subsection
40341 \begin_layout Standard
40342 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40343 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40346 \begin_layout Subsection
40350 \begin_layout Standard
40351 Selects the whole document.
40354 \begin_layout Subsection
40355 Find & Replace (Quick)
40358 \begin_layout Standard
40359 Described in section
40360 \begin_inset space ~
40364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40366 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40373 \begin_layout Subsection
40374 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40377 \begin_layout Standard
40378 Described in section
40379 \begin_inset space ~
40383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40385 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40392 \begin_layout Subsection
40393 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40396 \begin_layout Standard
40397 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40401 \begin_layout Subsection
40403 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40407 \begin_layout Standard
40409 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40410 Described in section
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40417 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40426 \begin_layout Subsection
40428 \begin_inset Index idx
40431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40432 Paragraph ! Settings
40440 \begin_layout Standard
40441 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40442 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40446 \begin_layout Standard
40447 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40448 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40455 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40463 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40467 \begin_layout Subsection
40469 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40473 \begin_layout Standard
40475 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40476 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40481 \begin_layout Enumerate
40483 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40484 Customize text properties by means of the
40490 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40493 ; this is described in section
40494 \begin_inset space ~
40498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40500 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40507 \begin_layout Enumerate
40509 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40510 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40512 Apply last settings
40515 \begin_layout Enumerate
40517 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40518 Change the casing of selected text (
40533 \begin_layout Subsection
40535 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40539 \begin_layout Standard
40541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40542 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40543 text styles (in the case of this document:
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40571 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40580 \begin_layout Subsection
40581 Table and Rows & Columns
40584 \begin_layout Standard
40585 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40586 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40587 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40590 \begin_layout Subsection
40594 \begin_layout Standard
40595 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40596 It will dissolve this inset.
40597 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40601 \begin_layout Subsection
40605 \begin_layout Standard
40606 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40607 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40610 \begin_layout Subsection
40611 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40614 \begin_layout Standard
40615 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40617 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40624 reference "sec:Nesting"
40629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40631 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40638 \begin_layout Section
40640 \begin_inset Index idx
40643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40652 \begin_layout Standard
40653 At the bottom of the
40657 menu the opened documents are listed.
40660 \begin_layout Subsection
40661 Open/Close all Insets
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40665 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40668 \begin_layout Subsection
40669 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40672 \begin_layout Standard
40673 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40676 \begin_layout Standard
40677 Math macros are described in the
40684 \begin_layout Subsection
40688 \begin_layout Standard
40689 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40696 reference "sec:Navigating"
40701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40703 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40710 \begin_layout Subsection
40714 \begin_layout Standard
40715 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40717 \begin_inset space ~
40721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40723 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40730 \begin_layout Subsection
40734 \begin_layout Standard
40735 Opens a window showing console messages.
40736 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40741 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40742 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40743 is processing the document.
40746 \begin_layout Subsection
40748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40750 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40755 \begin_inset Index idx
40758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40767 \begin_layout Standard
40768 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40770 All toolbars and the
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40778 can be turned on and off.
40783 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40807 \begin_inset space ~
40812 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40816 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40823 \begin_layout Standard
40828 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40832 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40833 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40834 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40835 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40836 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40839 \begin_layout Standard
40841 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40848 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40855 \begin_layout Subsection
40859 \begin_layout Standard
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40888 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40889 's main window vertically while
40892 \begin_inset space ~
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40917 will split it horizontally.
40918 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40919 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40920 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40921 three or more documents at the same time.
40922 To close a split view, use the menu
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40937 \begin_layout Subsection
40941 \begin_layout Standard
40942 Closes a split view.
40945 \begin_layout Subsection
40949 \begin_layout Standard
40950 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40951 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40952 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40953 's main window fullscreen.
40954 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40955 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40958 \begin_layout Section
40960 \begin_inset Index idx
40963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40972 \begin_layout Subsection
40976 \begin_layout Standard
40977 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40984 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40995 \begin_layout Subsection
40997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40999 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41006 \begin_layout Standard
41007 Here you can insert the following characters:
41010 \begin_layout Description
41015 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41018 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41019 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41020 -packages you have installed.
41021 You can get a complete display by checking
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41030 \begin_inset Newline newline
41034 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41042 Not all characters will be visible in the
41046 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41047 dialog (see section
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41054 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41058 ) can display every character.
41066 \begin_layout Description
41067 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41071 \begin_layout Description
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41080 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41087 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41094 \begin_layout Description
41096 \begin_inset space ~
41099 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41103 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41109 \begin_layout Description
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41114 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41118 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41124 \begin_layout Description
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41129 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41133 \begin_layout Description
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41138 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41142 \begin_layout Description
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41148 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41149 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41155 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41160 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41166 \begin_inset space \space{}
41169 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41170 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41179 To insert a fraction use the command
41184 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41188 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41197 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41204 \begin_layout Description
41206 \begin_inset space ~
41209 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41213 \begin_layout Description
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_inset Index idx
41222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41229 \begin_inset Index idx
41232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41233 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41238 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41239 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41241 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41247 \begin_inset Index idx
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41258 \begin_inset Newline newline
41261 More information about this feature can be found in the
41267 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41273 \begin_layout Description
41274 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41276 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41277 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41281 \begin_layout Subsection
41285 \begin_layout Standard
41286 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41289 \begin_layout Description
41290 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41291 \begin_inset script superscript
41293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41302 \begin_layout Description
41303 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41304 \begin_inset script subscript
41306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 \begin_layout Description
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41320 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41327 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41334 \begin_layout Description
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41339 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41340 \begin_inset space ~
41344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41346 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41358 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41365 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41372 \begin_layout Description
41374 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41376 \begin_inset space ~
41379 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41385 \begin_inset space \space{}
41388 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41389 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41398 To insert a fraction use the command
41403 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41407 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41416 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41425 \begin_layout Description
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41430 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41437 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41444 \begin_layout Description
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41449 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41456 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41463 \begin_layout Description
41465 \begin_inset space ~
41468 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41475 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41482 \begin_layout Description
41483 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41490 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41497 \begin_layout Description
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41502 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41509 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41516 \begin_layout Description
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41521 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41528 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41535 \begin_layout Description
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41541 \begin_inset space ~
41544 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41547 \begin_inset space ~
41551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41553 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41560 for a usage example.
41563 \begin_layout Description
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41572 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41573 \begin_inset space ~
41577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41579 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41586 \begin_layout Description
41588 \begin_inset space ~
41591 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41592 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41595 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41602 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41609 \begin_layout Description
41611 \begin_inset space ~
41614 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41621 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41628 \begin_layout Description
41630 \begin_inset space ~
41633 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41634 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41636 \begin_inset space ~
41640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41642 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41649 \begin_layout Description
41651 \begin_inset space ~
41654 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41661 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41668 \begin_layout Description
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41674 \begin_inset space ~
41677 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41678 \begin_inset space ~
41682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41684 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41691 \begin_layout Subsection
41693 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41697 \begin_layout Standard
41699 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41700 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41701 The submenu allows you to insert
41704 \begin_layout Description
41706 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41711 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41714 \begin_layout Description
41716 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41718 \begin_inset space ~
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41725 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41729 \begin_layout Description
41731 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41736 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41739 \begin_layout Description
41741 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41746 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41749 \begin_layout Description
41751 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41757 \begin_inset space ~
41760 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41764 \begin_layout Description
41766 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41768 \begin_inset space ~
41771 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41774 \begin_layout Description
41776 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41778 \begin_inset space ~
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41789 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41792 \begin_layout Description
41794 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41799 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41801 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41802 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41808 \begin_layout Description
41810 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41812 \begin_inset space ~
41815 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41817 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41818 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41824 \begin_layout Description
41826 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41827 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41828 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41829 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41832 \begin_layout Subsection
41835 List/Contents/References
41838 \begin_layout Standard
41839 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41864 are described in section
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41871 reference "sec:toc"
41880 is described in section
41881 \begin_inset space ~
41885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41887 reference "sec:Index"
41895 is described in section
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41902 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41908 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41911 is described in section
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41918 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41925 \begin_layout Subsection
41929 \begin_layout Standard
41930 To insert floats, as described in section
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41937 reference "sec:Floats"
41941 and in detail the chapter
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41956 \begin_layout Subsection
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41961 To insert notes, described in section
41962 \begin_inset space ~
41966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41968 reference "sec:Notes"
41975 \begin_layout Subsection
41979 \begin_layout Standard
41980 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41982 Branches are described in section
41983 \begin_inset space ~
41987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41989 reference "sec:Branches"
41996 \begin_layout Subsection
42000 \begin_layout Standard
42001 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42002 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42004 An example is the document class
42005 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42015 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42024 with three custom insets.
42027 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42031 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42037 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42040 \begin_layout Subsection
42042 \begin_inset Index idx
42045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42054 \begin_layout Standard
42055 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42057 For more information see chapter
42059 External Document Parts
42062 \begin_inset space ~
42068 \begin_layout Subsection
42070 \begin_inset Index idx
42073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42082 \begin_layout Standard
42083 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42084 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42091 \begin_inset space ~
42099 \begin_layout Subsection
42103 \begin_layout Standard
42108 dialog as described in section
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42115 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42122 \begin_layout Subsection
42126 \begin_layout Standard
42131 as described in section
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42138 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42145 \begin_layout Subsection
42149 \begin_layout Standard
42154 as described in section
42155 \begin_inset space ~
42159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42161 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42168 \begin_layout Subsection
42170 \begin_inset Index idx
42173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 \begin_inset Index idx
42183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42184 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42192 \begin_layout Standard
42193 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42194 Floats are described in section
42195 \begin_inset space ~
42199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42201 reference "sec:Floats"
42205 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42208 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42224 \begin_layout Subsection
42228 \begin_layout Standard
42229 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42230 \begin_inset space ~
42234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42236 reference "sec:Index"
42243 \begin_layout Subsection
42247 \begin_layout Standard
42248 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42255 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42262 \begin_layout Subsection
42266 \begin_layout Standard
42267 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42268 Tables are described in section
42269 \begin_inset space ~
42273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42275 reference "sec:Tables"
42279 and in detail in the chapter
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42294 \begin_layout Subsection
42298 \begin_layout Standard
42304 Graphics are described in section
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42311 reference "sec:Graphics"
42318 \begin_layout Subsection
42322 \begin_layout Standard
42323 Inserts a URL as described in section
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42330 reference "subsec:URLs"
42337 \begin_layout Subsection
42341 \begin_layout Standard
42342 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42349 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42356 \begin_layout Subsection
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42361 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42362 \begin_inset space ~
42366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42368 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42375 \begin_layout Subsection
42379 \begin_layout Standard
42380 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42381 \begin_inset space ~
42385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42387 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42394 \begin_layout Subsection
42397 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42400 \begin_layout Standard
42401 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42402 environments of the same type.
42404 \begin_inset space ~
42408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42410 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42414 for an explanation.
42417 \begin_layout Subsection
42421 \begin_layout Standard
42422 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42423 title or caption of a float.
42424 Inserts a short title as described in section
42425 \begin_inset space ~
42429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42431 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42438 \begin_layout Subsection
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42444 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42445 Code box as described in section
42446 \begin_inset space ~
42450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42452 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42459 \begin_layout Subsection
42461 \begin_inset Index idx
42464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42473 \begin_layout Standard
42474 Inserts a program listings box.
42475 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42477 Program Code Listings
42482 \begin_inset space ~
42490 \begin_layout Subsection
42492 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42496 \begin_layout Standard
42498 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42499 Inserts the actual date.
42500 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42507 \begin_layout Subsection
42511 \begin_layout Standard
42512 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42519 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42526 \begin_layout Section
42528 \begin_inset Index idx
42531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42540 \begin_layout Standard
42541 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42542 \begin_inset space ~
42545 of the current document.
42546 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42549 \begin_layout Subsection
42553 \begin_layout Standard
42554 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42555 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42556 to jump, for example, between section
42557 \begin_inset space ~
42561 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42565 2.5 and use the submenu
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42572 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42589 \begin_inset space ~
42595 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42599 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42605 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42608 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42611 \begin_layout Standard
42612 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42621 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42624 \begin_inset space ~
42629 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42632 \begin_layout Subsection
42633 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42636 \begin_layout Standard
42637 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42641 \begin_layout Subsection
42645 \begin_layout Standard
42646 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42647 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42648 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42652 \begin_inset space ~
42656 \begin_inset space ~
42664 \begin_layout Subsection
42668 \begin_layout Standard
42669 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42672 The \SpecialChar LyX
42673 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42683 \begin_inset space ~
42688 manual for a detailed description.
42691 \begin_layout Section
42693 \begin_inset Index idx
42696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 \begin_layout Subsection
42709 \begin_layout Standard
42710 Change Tracking is described in section
42711 \begin_inset space ~
42715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42717 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42724 \begin_layout Subsection
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42734 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42735 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42737 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42738 to the clipboard or update the view.
42739 \begin_inset Newline newline
42742 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42746 \begin_layout Standard
42749 Open Containing Directory
42751 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42752 's temporary folder for the document.
42753 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42754 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42755 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42756 For example some journals require to send the
42760 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42764 \begin_layout Subsection
42765 Start Appendix Here
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42769 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42770 as described in section
42771 \begin_inset space ~
42775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42777 reference "sec:Appendices"
42784 \begin_layout Subsection
42786 \begin_inset space ~
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42793 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42794 default output format for the document (menu
42796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42797 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42798 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42800 \begin_inset space ~
42804 \begin_inset space ~
42810 \begin_inset space ~
42814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42816 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42820 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42823 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42824 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42826 \begin_inset space ~
42829 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42831 \begin_inset space ~
42834 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42836 \begin_inset space ~
42840 \begin_inset space ~
42846 \begin_inset space ~
42850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42852 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42856 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42857 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42859 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42860 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42865 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42867 \begin_inset space ~
42870 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42874 \begin_inset space ~
42878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42880 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42885 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42886 when it is first configured.
42887 The default output format is
42890 \begin_inset space ~
42898 \begin_layout Subsection
42899 View (Other Formats)
42902 \begin_layout Standard
42903 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42904 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42905 actual document with an external program.
42906 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42907 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42908 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42910 All possible formats are listed in section
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42917 reference "subsec:Export"
42922 You should at least see the menu entry
42927 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42929 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42931 \begin_inset space ~
42935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42937 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42942 \begin_inset Index idx
42945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42946 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42955 \begin_layout Standard
42956 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42957 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42959 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42960 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42965 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42967 \begin_inset space ~
42970 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42980 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42985 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42986 when it is first configured.
42989 \begin_layout Subsection
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42997 \begin_layout Standard
42998 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42999 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43002 \begin_layout Subsection
43003 Update (Other Formats)
43006 \begin_layout Standard
43007 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43008 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43011 \begin_layout Subsection
43012 View Master Document
43015 \begin_layout Standard
43016 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43032 \begin_inset space ~
43037 manual for more information on this topic).
43038 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43039 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43043 \begin_inset space ~
43047 \begin_inset space ~
43052 generates the output of the whole book, while
43056 will just output the chapter alone.
43059 \begin_layout Standard
43060 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43061 in the document settings (menu
43063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43064 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43065 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43067 \begin_inset space ~
43071 \begin_inset space ~
43077 \begin_inset space ~
43081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43083 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43087 ) or in the preferences (menu
43089 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43090 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43092 \begin_inset space ~
43095 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43100 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43112 \begin_inset space ~
43116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43118 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43125 \begin_layout Subsection
43126 Update Master Document
43129 \begin_layout Standard
43130 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43151 manual for more information on this topic).
43152 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43153 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43156 \begin_layout Standard
43157 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43158 in the document settings (menu
43160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43161 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43162 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43164 \begin_inset space ~
43168 \begin_inset space ~
43174 \begin_inset space ~
43178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43180 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43184 ) or in the preferences (menu
43186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43187 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43189 \begin_inset space ~
43192 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43194 \begin_inset space ~
43197 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43199 \begin_inset space ~
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_inset space ~
43213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43215 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43222 \begin_layout Subsection
43224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43226 name "subsec:Compressed"
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43234 Un/compresses the current document.
43235 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43236 compression (see the
43238 Additional Features
43240 manual for details).
43243 \begin_layout Subsection
43247 \begin_layout Standard
43248 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43251 \begin_layout Subsection
43255 \begin_layout Standard
43256 The document settings are described in appendix
43257 \begin_inset space ~
43261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43263 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43270 \begin_layout Section
43272 \begin_inset Index idx
43275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43284 \begin_layout Subsection
43288 \begin_layout Standard
43289 Spell checking is explained in section
43290 \begin_inset space ~
43294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43296 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43303 \begin_layout Subsection
43307 \begin_layout Standard
43308 The thesaurus is described in section
43309 \begin_inset space ~
43313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43315 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43322 \begin_layout Subsection
43324 \begin_inset Index idx
43327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43334 \begin_inset Index idx
43337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 \begin_layout Standard
43347 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43348 the highlighted document part.
43351 \begin_layout Subsection
43357 \begin_inset Index idx
43360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43370 \begin_layout Standard
43371 Generates with the help of the program
43373 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43376 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43377 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43378 This feature is not available on Windows.
43381 \begin_layout Subsection
43387 \begin_inset Index idx
43390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43400 \begin_layout Standard
43401 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43411 to see the full filename paths.
43414 \begin_layout Subsection
43416 \begin_inset Index idx
43419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43428 \begin_layout Standard
43429 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43430 files as described in section
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43437 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43444 \begin_layout Subsection
43446 \begin_inset Index idx
43449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43462 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43480 \begin_inset Index idx
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43493 \begin_layout Standard
43494 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43495 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43496 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43497 -packages and programs it needs; see
43499 \begin_inset space ~
43503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43505 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43512 \begin_layout Subsection
43516 \begin_layout Standard
43521 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43528 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43535 \begin_layout Section
43537 \begin_inset Index idx
43540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 \begin_layout Standard
43550 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43551 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43553 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43557 \begin_layout Standard
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43566 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43567 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43568 packages and classes found
43569 by \SpecialChar LyX
43571 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43577 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43584 \begin_layout Standard
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43593 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43598 \begin_layout Section
43600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43602 name "sec:Toolbars"
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43610 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43611 \begin_inset space ~
43615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43617 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43624 \begin_layout Standard
43625 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43626 This is described in the
43628 Additional Features
43633 \begin_layout Subsection
43635 \begin_inset Index idx
43638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43647 \begin_layout Standard
43648 \begin_inset Graphics
43649 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43658 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43664 \begin_layout Standard
43665 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43682 \begin_inset Note Note
43685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43686 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43691 manual for more information.
43699 \begin_layout Standard
43700 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43706 \begin_layout Standard
43707 \begin_inset Tabular
43708 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43709 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43711 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43717 \begin_inset Graphics
43718 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43732 pull-down box for the environments
43745 \begin_layout Standard
43746 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43752 \begin_layout Standard
43754 \begin_inset Tabular
43755 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43756 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43757 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43758 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43759 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43782 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43812 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43842 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43872 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43888 arg "spelling-continuously"
43896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43900 Spellcheck continuously
43906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43929 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43989 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44049 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44051 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44056 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44065 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44088 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44114 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44128 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44156 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44170 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44171 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44199 Emphasize text, function of the
44200 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44203 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44205 \begin_inset space ~
44208 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44210 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44216 arg "dialog-show character"
44227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44248 Set text to noun style, function of the
44249 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44252 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44254 \begin_inset space ~
44257 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44265 arg "dialog-show character"
44276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44282 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44285 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44298 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44301 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44314 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44319 arg "textstyle-apply"
44329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44334 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44335 Format text using the current settings in the
44337 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44339 \begin_inset space ~
44342 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44377 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44397 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44425 arg "tabular-insert"
44433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44452 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44455 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44468 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44487 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44499 Toggle outline window on/off,
44501 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44517 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44529 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44544 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44556 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44569 \begin_layout Subsection
44571 \begin_inset Index idx
44574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44583 \begin_layout Standard
44584 \begin_inset Graphics
44585 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44593 \begin_layout Standard
44594 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44600 \begin_layout Standard
44601 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44605 \begin_layout Standard
44606 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44612 \begin_layout Standard
44613 \begin_inset Tabular
44614 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44615 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44616 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44617 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44645 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44654 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44708 arg "layout-toggle List"
44716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44735 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44762 arg "depth-increment"
44770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44776 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44778 \begin_inset space ~
44782 \begin_inset space ~
44791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44800 arg "depth-decrement"
44808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44814 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44816 \begin_inset space ~
44820 \begin_inset space ~
44829 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44838 arg "float-insert figure"
44846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44853 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44869 arg "float-insert table"
44877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44884 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44930 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44960 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45024 arg "nomencl-insert"
45032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45058 arg "footnote-insert"
45066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45104 \begin_inset space ~
45113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45137 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45139 \begin_inset space ~
45148 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45157 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45251 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45266 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45282 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45297 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45299 \begin_inset space ~
45308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45317 arg "dialog-show character"
45325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45333 \begin_inset space ~
45336 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45354 arg "textstyle-apply"
45362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45367 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45368 Format text using the recent settings in the
45371 arg "dialog-show character"
45380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45389 arg "layout-paragraph"
45397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45403 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45405 \begin_inset space ~
45414 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45423 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45451 \begin_layout Subsection
45452 View/Update Toolbar
45453 \begin_inset Index idx
45456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45457 Toolbar ! View / Update
45465 \begin_layout Standard
45466 \begin_inset Graphics
45467 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45474 \begin_layout Standard
45475 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45481 \begin_layout Standard
45482 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45486 \begin_layout Standard
45487 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45493 \begin_layout Standard
45494 \begin_inset Tabular
45495 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45496 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45497 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45498 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45538 arg "buffer-update"
45546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45568 arg "master-buffer-view"
45576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45584 \begin_inset space ~
45593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 arg "master-buffer-update"
45610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45618 \begin_inset space ~
45622 \begin_inset space ~
45631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45655 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45656 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45657 Synchronize with Output
45663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45674 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45691 View (Other Formats)
45697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45704 arg "update-others"
45708 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45723 Update (Other Formats)
45736 \begin_layout Standard
45738 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45739 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45745 \begin_layout Subsection
45749 \begin_layout Standard
45750 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45751 \begin_inset space ~
45755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45757 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45761 , the table toolbar
45762 \begin_inset Index idx
45765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 \begin_inset space ~
45779 manual and the math macro toolbar
45780 \begin_inset Index idx
45783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 \begin_layout Chapter
45797 The Document Settings
45798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45800 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45805 \begin_inset Index idx
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45809 Document ! Settings
45817 \begin_layout Standard
45821 \begin_inset space ~
45826 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45827 is called with the menu
45829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45833 You can save your document settings as default with the
45835 Save as Document Defaults
45837 button in any dialog.
45838 This will create a template named
45842 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45843 when you create a new document without
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45852 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45853 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45856 \begin_layout Standard
45857 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45858 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45859 to find the one you are looking for.
45860 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45861 the submenus of the dialog.
45863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45867 \begin_inset space \space{}
45871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45878 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45879 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45880 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45883 \begin_layout Section
45887 \begin_layout Standard
45888 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45890 Document classes are described in section
45891 \begin_inset space ~
45895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45897 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45905 \begin_layout Standard
45909 \begin_inset space ~
45914 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45919 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45920 as a layout for a document class.
45921 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45923 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45933 Some classes use special class options by default.
45934 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45938 and you can decide to use them or not.
45939 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45940 recommended you leave them untouched.
45945 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45946 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45951 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45953 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45960 \begin_inset Newline newline
45965 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45968 \begin_inset Newline newline
45971 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45972 distribution, see section
45977 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45979 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45992 \begin_layout Standard
45997 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45998 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45999 in the background if the child document
46000 is opened without its master.
46001 This way child documents are always compilable.
46002 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46009 \begin_inset space ~
46017 \begin_layout Standard
46018 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46029 \begin_inset Index idx
46032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 packages ! prettyref
46040 \begin_inset Index idx
46043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46045 packages ! refstyle
46050 for cross-references, see section
46051 \begin_inset space ~
46055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46057 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46064 \begin_layout Section
46068 \begin_layout Standard
46069 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46070 Please refer to the section
46073 \begin_inset space ~
46081 \begin_inset space ~
46086 manual for details.
46089 \begin_layout Section
46093 \begin_layout Standard
46094 Modules are explained in section
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46101 reference "subsec:Modules"
46108 \begin_layout Section
46112 \begin_layout Standard
46114 \begin_inset space ~
46118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46120 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46127 \begin_layout Section
46131 \begin_layout Standard
46132 The document font settings are described in section
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46139 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46146 \begin_layout Section
46150 \begin_layout Standard
46151 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46168 and whether it should be a
46171 \begin_inset space ~
46176 can also be specified here.
46179 \begin_layout Standard
46180 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46181 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46182 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46184 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46187 \begin_layout Standard
46190 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46193 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46194 justifies the text on screen.
46195 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46197 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46201 \begin_layout Standard
46203 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46212 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46217 \begin_layout Section
46221 \begin_layout Standard
46222 This dialog is described in sections
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46229 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46236 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46243 \begin_layout Section
46247 \begin_layout Standard
46248 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46249 \begin_inset space ~
46253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46255 reference "subsec:Margins"
46262 \begin_layout Section
46264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46266 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46271 \begin_inset Index idx
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 Language ! Encoding
46283 \begin_layout Standard
46284 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46285 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46286 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46288 is always encoded in utf8).
46289 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46290 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46291 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46292 -command is not known for
46293 a particular character).
46294 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46298 \begin_layout Standard
46300 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46301 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46302 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46303 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46304 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46305 's default encoding).
46306 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46307 's Unicode support covers the
46308 characters of most scripts.
46309 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46310 using one of the traditional, or
46311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46318 , encodings is necessary.
46321 \begin_layout Standard
46323 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46325 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46328 Traditional (auto-selected)
46334 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46335 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46336 the given language(s).
46338 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46342 \begin_layout Standard
46344 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46345 If you use the option
46350 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46353 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46354 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46357 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46360 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46361 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46362 exactly one encoding.
46363 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46368 \begin_layout Standard
46370 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46371 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46377 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46378 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46382 \begin_layout Standard
46384 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46385 Finally, you can also select
46389 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46390 Note that this encoding is then used for
46395 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46396 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46400 \begin_layout Standard
46402 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46405 Do not load inputenc
46407 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46408 from automatically loading the
46415 \begin_inset Index idx
46418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46422 packages ! inputenc
46430 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46431 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46432 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46433 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46434 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46436 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46442 Traditional (auto-selected)
46449 \begin_layout Standard
46451 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46453 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46454 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46455 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46456 installation supports Unicode), choose
46457 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46458 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46459 is quite incomplete, so
46460 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46465 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46466 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46467 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46468 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46469 -commands is not used, because all
46470 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46471 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46472 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46473 , two new alternative engines
46474 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46476 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46478 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46481 \begin_inset space ~
46489 \begin_inset space ~
46497 \begin_inset space ~
46503 \begin_inset space ~
46507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46509 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46514 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46518 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46523 \begin_layout Standard
46527 \begin_inset space ~
46532 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46533 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46543 The possible settings are:
46546 \begin_layout Description
46547 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46549 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46550 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46560 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46567 \begin_layout Description
46568 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46569 format you will use.
46570 In many cases this will be
46575 \begin_inset Index idx
46578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46586 If the newer package
46591 \begin_inset Index idx
46594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46596 packages ! polyglossia
46601 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46602 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46603 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46605 this package will be used instead of
46612 \begin_layout Description
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46625 would be more appropriate.
46628 \begin_layout Description
46629 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46630 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46634 (for German texts), type in
46637 \begin_inset Newline newline
46642 usepackage{ngerman}
46645 \begin_layout Description
46646 None will not use a language package.
46647 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46650 \begin_layout Standard
46651 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46654 \begin_layout Description
46656 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46658 \begin_inset space ~
46662 \begin_inset space ~
46666 \begin_inset space ~
46673 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46679 \begin_inset Index idx
46682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46684 packages ! inputenc
46690 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46691 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46692 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46698 \begin_layout Description
46699 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46701 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46702 commands, which may result in a big
46703 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46704 -commands are needed.
46706 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46707 This is the same as the
46720 \begin_layout Description
46722 \begin_inset space ~
46726 \begin_inset space ~
46729 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46732 \begin_layout Description
46734 \begin_inset space ~
46738 \begin_inset space ~
46741 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46744 \begin_layout Description
46746 \begin_inset space ~
46749 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46752 \begin_layout Description
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46758 \begin_inset space ~
46761 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46762 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46765 \begin_layout Description
46767 \begin_inset space ~
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46774 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46778 \begin_layout Description
46780 \begin_inset space ~
46784 \begin_inset space ~
46787 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46788 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46791 \begin_layout Description
46793 \begin_inset space ~
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46804 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46811 \begin_layout Description
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46817 \begin_inset space ~
46821 \begin_inset space ~
46824 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46825 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46828 \begin_layout Description
46830 \begin_inset space ~
46834 \begin_inset space ~
46837 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46838 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46839 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46840 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46845 \begin_inset space ~
46851 \begin_layout Description
46853 \begin_inset space ~
46857 \begin_inset space ~
46860 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46861 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46862 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46864 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46869 \begin_inset space ~
46875 \begin_layout Description
46877 \begin_inset space ~
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46884 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46887 \begin_layout Description
46889 \begin_inset space ~
46893 \begin_inset space ~
46896 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46899 \begin_layout Description
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46905 \begin_inset space ~
46908 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46911 \begin_layout Description
46913 \begin_inset space ~
46916 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46919 \begin_layout Description
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46924 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46927 \begin_layout Description
46929 \begin_inset space ~
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46936 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46939 \begin_layout Description
46941 \begin_inset space ~
46945 \begin_inset space ~
46951 \begin_layout Description
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46957 \begin_inset space ~
46960 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46963 \begin_layout Description
46965 \begin_inset space ~
46969 \begin_inset space ~
46975 \begin_layout Description
46977 \begin_inset space ~
46981 \begin_inset space ~
46984 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46990 \begin_inset Index idx
46993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47000 , when using this, set the document language to
47005 \begin_layout Description
47007 \begin_inset space ~
47011 \begin_inset space ~
47014 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47019 , when using this, set the document language to
47022 \begin_inset space ~
47028 \begin_layout Description
47030 \begin_inset space ~
47034 \begin_inset space ~
47037 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47043 \begin_inset Index idx
47046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47048 packages ! japanese
47053 , when using this, set the document language to
47058 \begin_layout Description
47060 \begin_inset space ~
47064 \begin_inset space ~
47067 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47072 , when using this, set the document language to
47077 \begin_layout Description
47079 \begin_inset space ~
47083 \begin_inset space ~
47086 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47091 , when using this, set the document language to
47096 \begin_layout Description
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47101 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47104 \begin_layout Description
47106 \begin_inset space ~
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset space ~
47117 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47120 \begin_layout Description
47122 \begin_inset space ~
47126 \begin_inset space ~
47130 \begin_inset space ~
47133 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47134 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47135 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47138 \begin_layout Description
47140 \begin_inset space ~
47144 \begin_inset space ~
47150 \begin_layout Description
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47159 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47160 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47163 \begin_layout Description
47165 \begin_inset space ~
47169 \begin_inset space ~
47172 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47178 \begin_inset Index idx
47181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47188 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47189 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47191 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47192 with the default encoding (
47194 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47200 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47201 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47206 \begin_layout Description
47208 \begin_inset space ~
47216 \begin_inset space ~
47219 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47226 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47229 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47236 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47237 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47239 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47242 \begin_layout Description
47244 \begin_inset space ~
47248 \begin_inset space ~
47251 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47257 \begin_inset Index idx
47260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47268 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47271 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47273 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47274 This used to be more comprehensive than
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47282 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47287 \begin_layout Description
47289 \begin_inset space ~
47292 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47298 \begin_inset Index idx
47301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47303 packages ! inputenc
47310 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47311 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47313 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47314 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47315 with the default encoding (
47317 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47323 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47324 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47329 \begin_layout Description
47331 \begin_inset space ~
47335 \begin_inset space ~
47339 \begin_inset space ~
47342 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47343 \begin_inset space ~
47349 \begin_layout Description
47351 \begin_inset space ~
47355 \begin_inset space ~
47359 \begin_inset space ~
47362 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47363 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47364 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47368 \begin_layout Description
47370 \begin_inset space ~
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47378 \begin_inset space ~
47381 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47382 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47385 \begin_layout Section
47387 \begin_inset Index idx
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47397 \begin_inset Index idx
47400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47407 \begin_inset Index idx
47410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47411 Color ! Shaded boxes
47417 \begin_inset Index idx
47420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47421 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47429 \begin_layout Standard
47430 Here you can alter the font color for the
47434 (default: black), for
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47442 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47446 (default: white) and for
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47459 sets the color back to the default.
47462 \begin_layout Standard
47463 Clicking any button showing
47471 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47472 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47473 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47474 later more quickly.
47477 \begin_layout Standard
47478 Note, if you change the
47481 \begin_inset space ~
47486 font color and use the option
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47494 in the document settings under
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47502 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47503 \begin_inset space ~
47507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47509 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47516 \begin_layout Standard
47517 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47523 \begin_layout Standard
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47536 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47542 Code after a forced page break:
47545 \begin_layout Itemize
47546 For the page color:
47547 \begin_inset Newline newline
47554 pagecolor{color name}
47557 \begin_layout Itemize
47558 For the text color:
47559 \begin_inset Newline newline
47569 \begin_layout Standard
47570 You are restricted to one of
47606 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47613 \begin_inset space ~
47619 \begin_inset Newline newline
47622 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47623 names to refer to them:
47626 \begin_layout Itemize
47632 \begin_inset Newline newline
47637 page_backgroundcolor
47640 \begin_layout Itemize
47644 \begin_inset space ~
47650 \begin_inset Newline newline
47658 \begin_layout Itemize
47662 \begin_inset space ~
47668 \begin_inset Newline newline
47676 \begin_layout Itemize
47680 \begin_inset space ~
47686 \begin_inset Newline newline
47694 \begin_layout Standard
47695 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47698 \begin_inset space ~
47706 \begin_inset space ~
47714 \begin_layout Section
47716 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47720 \begin_layout Standard
47722 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47723 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47724 \begin_inset space ~
47728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47730 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47738 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47739 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47742 \begin_layout Standard
47744 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47745 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47747 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47750 \begin_layout Section
47754 \begin_layout Standard
47755 Here you can adjust the
47759 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47763 as described in section
47764 \begin_inset space ~
47768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47770 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47775 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47779 \begin_layout Standard
47781 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47782 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47784 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47785 of this package can be used as well.
47786 The most common one are:
47789 \begin_layout Description
47791 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47792 right Line numbers to the right margin
47795 \begin_layout Description
47797 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47798 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47802 \begin_layout Description
47804 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47805 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47808 \begin_layout Description
47810 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47811 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47814 \begin_layout Description
47816 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47821 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47826 \begin_layout Section
47830 \begin_layout Standard
47831 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47837 \begin_inset Index idx
47840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47842 packages ! biblatex
47852 \begin_inset Index idx
47855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47867 \begin_inset Index idx
47870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47878 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47881 Sectioned bibliography
47883 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47889 \begin_inset Index idx
47892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47894 packages ! bibtopic
47904 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47905 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47909 for the generation of the bibliography.
47910 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47911 \begin_inset space ~
47915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47917 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47924 \begin_layout Section
47928 \begin_layout Standard
47929 Here you can define the
47933 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47941 reference "sec:Index"
47948 \begin_layout Section
47952 \begin_layout Standard
47953 The PDF properties are explained in section
47954 \begin_inset space ~
47958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47960 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47967 \begin_layout Section
47971 \begin_layout Standard
47972 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47973 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47979 \begin_inset Index idx
47982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47994 \begin_inset Index idx
47997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48009 \begin_inset Index idx
48012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48024 \begin_inset Index idx
48027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48039 \begin_inset Index idx
48042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48044 packages ! mathdots
48054 \begin_inset Index idx
48057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48059 packages ! mathtools
48069 \begin_inset Index idx
48072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48084 \begin_inset Index idx
48087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48089 packages ! stackrel
48099 \begin_inset Index idx
48102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48104 packages ! stmaryrd
48114 \begin_inset Index idx
48117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48119 packages ! undertilde
48124 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48127 \begin_layout Description
48128 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48129 -errors in formulas,
48130 ensure that you have this enabled.
48133 \begin_layout Description
48134 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48135 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48136 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48140 \begin_layout Description
48141 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48144 \begin_inset space ~
48156 \begin_layout Description
48157 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48160 \begin_inset space ~
48172 \begin_layout Description
48173 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48184 \begin_layout Description
48185 mathtools is used for the math commands
48221 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48228 \begin_layout Description
48229 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48231 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48240 \begin_layout Description
48241 stackrel is used for the math command
48258 \begin_layout Description
48259 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48262 \begin_layout Description
48263 undertilde is used for the math command
48271 Accents for one Character
48280 \begin_layout Section
48282 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48284 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48290 \begin_layout Standard
48292 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48293 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48296 \begin_layout Standard
48298 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48299 The float placement options
48300 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48303 are described in the section
48306 \begin_inset space ~
48310 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48312 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48328 \begin_layout Section
48332 \begin_layout Standard
48333 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48335 Program Code Listings
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48348 \begin_layout Section
48352 \begin_layout Standard
48353 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48361 set to be used and set the
48366 The itemize environment is described in section
48367 \begin_inset space ~
48371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48373 reference "sec:Itemize"
48380 \begin_layout Standard
48381 You can furthermore specify a
48384 \begin_inset space ~
48389 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48390 command of the desired character.
48391 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48398 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48404 \begin_inset space \space{}
48408 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48418 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48419 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48422 \begin_layout Standard
48423 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48431 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48432 -packages in the preamble (menu
48435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48436 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48439 \begin_inset space ~
48445 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48449 usepackage{textcomp}
48452 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48456 usepackage{amssymb}
48466 \begin_layout Section
48470 \begin_layout Standard
48471 Branches are described in section
48472 \begin_inset space ~
48476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48478 reference "sec:Branches"
48485 \begin_layout Section
48487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48489 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48496 \begin_layout Standard
48497 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48500 \begin_layout Description
48502 \begin_inset space ~
48506 \begin_inset space ~
48509 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48529 View Master Document
48530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48537 Update Master Document
48538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48545 menu or the toolbar.
48546 The default is set in
48548 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48549 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48551 \begin_inset space ~
48554 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48558 \begin_inset space ~
48562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48564 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48571 \begin_layout Description
48573 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48575 \begin_inset space ~
48579 \begin_inset space ~
48583 \begin_inset space ~
48586 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48591 option which is needed with some packages.
48592 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48593 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48596 \begin_layout Description
48598 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48600 \begin_inset space ~
48604 \begin_inset space ~
48607 Options offers settings for the
48615 \begin_layout Itemize
48619 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48621 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48623 \begin_inset space ~
48629 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48631 \begin_inset space ~
48635 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48641 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48643 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48644 settings for the menu
48646 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48650 \begin_inset space ~
48654 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48657 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48658 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48663 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48665 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48667 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48670 or a detailed description see section
48672 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48677 \begin_inset space ~
48683 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48687 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48691 \begin_layout Itemize
48693 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48696 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48698 determines whether so-called
48699 \begin_inset Quotes els
48703 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48707 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48709 \begin_inset Quotes els
48713 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48716 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48717 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48718 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48720 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48722 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48723 macros, you can uncheck this.
48724 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48731 \begin_layout Description
48733 \begin_inset space ~
48737 \begin_inset space ~
48740 Options offers settings for the export format
48748 \begin_inset space ~
48753 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48754 \begin_inset space ~
48757 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48761 \begin_inset space ~
48766 settings are described in detail in section
48768 Math Output in XHTML
48773 \begin_inset space ~
48782 \begin_inset space ~
48786 \begin_inset space ~
48791 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48794 \begin_layout Description
48796 \begin_inset space ~
48801 Save transient properties
48803 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48804 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48805 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48809 \begin_layout Itemize
48810 the activation of change tracking
48813 \begin_layout Itemize
48814 the output of tracked changes
48817 \begin_layout Itemize
48818 the recording of the document directory path.
48821 \begin_layout Standard
48822 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48823 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48827 \begin_layout Section
48835 \begin_layout Standard
48836 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48838 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48840 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48842 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48846 \begin_layout Standard
48847 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48848 -syntax is given in section
48849 \begin_inset space ~
48853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48855 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48862 \begin_layout Chapter
48868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48870 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48875 \begin_inset Index idx
48878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48887 \begin_layout Standard
48888 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48890 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48894 It has the following submenus.
48897 \begin_layout Section
48901 \begin_layout Subsection
48905 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48906 User Interface File
48907 \begin_inset Index idx
48910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48911 Customization ! of toolbars
48917 \begin_inset Index idx
48920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48921 Customization ! of menus
48929 \begin_layout Standard
48930 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48931 interface (ui) file.
48932 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48940 \begin_layout Description
48945 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48948 \begin_layout Description
48955 the menu entries in popup context menus
48958 \begin_layout Description
48963 specifies the toolbar buttons
48966 \begin_layout Standard
48967 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48968 and edit the entries.
48971 \begin_layout Standard
48972 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48984 entries must be finished with an explicit
49009 and in the case of the
49010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49022 The syntax for the entries is:
49025 \begin_layout Standard
49026 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49055 \begin_layout Standard
49057 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49060 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49061 -functions are listed in the menu
49063 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49065 \begin_inset space ~
49073 \begin_layout Standard
49074 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49080 \begin_layout Standard
49081 For example, assuming you use the menu
49083 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49086 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49090 \begin_layout Standard
49091 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49115 \begin_layout Standard
49117 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49132 to have the sixth bookmark.
49135 \begin_layout Standard
49139 \begin_inset space ~
49144 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49145 's toolbar buttons.
49146 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49147 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49150 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49162 \begin_layout Standard
49165 Enable tool tips in main work area
49167 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49175 \begin_layout Standard
49180 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49181 should display in the menu
49183 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49185 \begin_inset space ~
49193 \begin_layout Subsection
49197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49201 \begin_layout Standard
49204 Restore window layouts and geometries
49207 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49208 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49212 \begin_layout Standard
49215 Restore cursor positions
49217 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49221 \begin_layout Standard
49224 Load opened files from last session
49226 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49230 \begin_layout Standard
49233 Clear all session information
49235 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49236 sessions (cursor positions, names
49237 of last opened documents, etc.).
49240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49244 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49249 \begin_inset Index idx
49252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49261 \begin_layout Standard
49264 Backup original documents when saving
49266 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49267 it was saved the last time.
49268 It is stored in the
49271 \begin_inset space ~
49277 \begin_inset space ~
49281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49283 reference "sec:Paths"
49287 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49290 \begin_inset space ~
49296 The backup file has the file extension
49297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49311 \begin_layout Standard
49314 Backup documents, every
49316 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49319 \begin_layout Standard
49322 Save documents compressed by default
49324 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49325 \begin_inset space ~
49329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49331 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49336 This applies to newly created documents only.
49337 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49341 Windows & work area
49344 \begin_layout Standard
49347 Open documents in tabs
49349 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49353 \begin_layout Standard
49358 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49365 \begin_inset space ~
49369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49371 reference "sec:Paths"
49375 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49382 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49383 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49384 of \SpecialChar LyX
49386 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49387 instance is created for each file.
49390 \begin_layout Standard
49393 Single close-tab button
49395 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49405 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49406 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49407 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49411 \begin_layout Standard
49412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49420 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49421 before the change takes effect.
49429 \begin_layout Standard
49434 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49436 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49438 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49442 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49443 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49444 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49447 \begin_layout Subsection
49449 \begin_inset Index idx
49452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49461 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49468 \begin_layout Standard
49469 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49473 \begin_layout Standard
49474 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49482 This section only deals with the fonts
49486 the \SpecialChar LyX
49488 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49492 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49503 \begin_layout Standard
49504 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49521 (depends on the system) as its
49524 \begin_inset space ~
49540 \begin_layout Standard
49541 You can change the font size with the
49548 \begin_layout Standard
49553 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49558 points have the size of 1
49559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49563 \begin_inset space ~
49567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49569 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49574 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49579 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49580 \begin_inset space ~
49584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49586 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49593 \begin_layout Subsection
49595 \begin_inset Index idx
49598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49599 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49606 \begin_inset Index idx
49609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49618 \begin_layout Standard
49619 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49620 by choosing an item in the
49621 list and selecting the
49628 \begin_layout Standard
49629 By checking the option
49633 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49636 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49637 \begin_inset space ~
49641 \begin_inset space ~
49646 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49649 \begin_layout Subsection
49651 \begin_inset Index idx
49654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 \begin_layout Standard
49664 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49668 \begin_layout Standard
49673 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49674 This feature is described in section
49675 \begin_inset space ~
49679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49681 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49688 \begin_layout Standard
49689 Checking the option
49692 \begin_inset space ~
49696 \begin_inset space ~
49700 \begin_inset space ~
49705 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49708 \begin_layout Section
49710 \begin_inset Index idx
49713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49722 \begin_layout Subsection
49726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49730 \begin_layout Standard
49733 Cursor follows scrollbar
49735 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49739 \begin_layout Standard
49740 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49741 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49742 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49745 \begin_layout Standard
49748 Scroll below end of document
49750 is self-explanatory.
49753 \begin_layout Standard
49754 In \SpecialChar LyX
49755 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49762 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49764 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49765 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49766 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49770 \begin_layout Standard
49772 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49775 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49777 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49778 paste operations (i.
49779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49782 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49783 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49784 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49785 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49786 dissolving from insets.
49791 \begin_layout Standard
49794 Sort environments alphabetically
49796 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49799 \begin_layout Standard
49802 Group environments by their category
49804 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49807 \begin_layout Standard
49812 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49827 \begin_layout Standard
49828 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49833 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49834 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49838 \begin_layout Subsection
49840 \begin_inset Index idx
49843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49850 \begin_inset Index idx
49853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49854 Settings ! Shortcuts
49862 \begin_layout Standard
49867 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49869 Several binding files are available, among them:
49872 \begin_layout Description
49873 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49876 \begin_layout Description
49877 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49889 \begin_layout Description
49890 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49901 \begin_layout Standard
49902 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49907 , and binding files for special languages.
49908 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49913 \begin_inset space \space{}
49917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49925 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49926 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49927 will try to use the appropriate binding
49931 \begin_layout Standard
49932 Some binding files, like
49936 , only have a limited scope.
49937 When looking at the end of the file
49941 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49944 \begin_layout Standard
49948 \begin_inset space ~
49952 \begin_inset space ~
49957 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49958 in the selected key binding file.
49961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49965 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49970 \begin_inset Index idx
49973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49974 Key Bindings ! Editing
49982 \begin_layout Standard
49983 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49984 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49985 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49986 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49989 Show key-bindings containing
49992 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49993 Insert there for example as keyword
49994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50001 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50002 functions that contain
50003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50011 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50012 All \SpecialChar LyX
50013 functions are also listed in the file
50018 that you will find in the
50025 \begin_layout Standard
50026 For example, to add the shortcut
50034 , select the function and press the
50039 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50040 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50043 \begin_layout Standard
50044 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50045 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50047 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
50048 function names as a semicolon separated list.
50050 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50055 \begin_layout Standard
50056 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50059 \begin_layout Standard
50060 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50062 The syntax of the entries is:
50065 \begin_layout Standard
50071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50090 \begin_layout Standard
50091 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50092 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50120 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50121 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50122 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50123 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50125 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50129 , you needed to specify it as
50134 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50137 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50140 \begin_layout Subsection
50142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50144 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50149 \begin_inset Index idx
50152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50159 \begin_inset Index idx
50162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50163 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50171 \begin_layout Standard
50172 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50173 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50174 provides keyboard maps.
50175 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50176 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50179 \begin_inset space ~
50183 \begin_inset space ~
50188 and select the keyboard map file named
50195 \begin_layout Standard
50204 keyboard map and, if you use the
50208 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50211 arg "keymap-primary"
50217 arg "keymap-secondary"
50220 respectively or toggle between them with
50223 arg "keymap-toggle"
50229 \begin_layout Standard
50230 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50238 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50247 \begin_layout Standard
50248 You can also specify the mouse
50250 Wheel scrolling speed
50253 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50257 Middle mouse button pasting
50259 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50260 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50263 \begin_layout Standard
50271 \begin_inset space ~
50275 \begin_inset space ~
50280 you can select a key for zooming.
50281 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50284 \begin_layout Subsection
50288 \begin_layout Standard
50289 Input completion is described in section
50290 \begin_inset space ~
50294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50296 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50303 \begin_layout Section
50305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50312 \begin_inset Index idx
50315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50322 \begin_inset Index idx
50325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50334 \begin_layout Standard
50335 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50336 are normally determined during
50338 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50341 \begin_layout Description
50343 \begin_inset space ~
50346 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50347 's working directory.
50348 It is the default when you
50359 \begin_inset space ~
50367 \begin_layout Description
50369 \begin_inset space ~
50372 templates This directory
50373 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50374 contains the templates that are shown
50375 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50376 will be opened when you use the menu
50377 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50382 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50384 \begin_inset space ~
50388 \begin_inset space ~
50396 \begin_layout Description
50398 \begin_inset space ~
50401 files This directory
50402 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50403 will be opened when you use the
50404 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50405 contains the example files that are listed in
50408 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50417 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50419 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50421 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50427 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50429 \begin_inset Newline newline
50433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50445 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50446 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50456 \begin_layout Description
50458 \begin_inset space ~
50462 \begin_inset Index idx
50465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50471 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50472 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50473 \begin_inset space ~
50477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50479 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50487 will be used to save the backups.
50488 \begin_inset Newline newline
50491 Backup files have the ending
50492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50502 \begin_layout Description
50504 \begin_inset space ~
50507 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50508 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50510 \begin_inset Newline newline
50517 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50523 You can edit this file with the program
50532 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50533 in its preferences under
50536 \begin_inset space ~
50542 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50547 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50549 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50550 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50556 and \SpecialChar LyX
50557 need to be running the same time.
50558 \begin_inset Newline newline
50561 The pipe is also used for the
50565 feature, see section
50566 \begin_inset space ~
50570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50572 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50577 \begin_inset Newline newline
50580 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50581 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50582 \begin_inset Newline newline
50598 \begin_layout Description
50600 \begin_inset space ~
50603 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50606 \begin_layout Description
50608 \begin_inset space ~
50611 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50612 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50613 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50616 \begin_layout Description
50618 \begin_inset space ~
50621 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50627 You only need to specify it if you are using
50631 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50633 For \SpecialChar LyX
50638 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50642 \begin_layout Description
50644 \begin_inset space ~
50647 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50648 When \SpecialChar LyX
50649 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50650 to find it on the system.
50651 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50653 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50662 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50663 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50666 \begin_layout Description
50668 \begin_inset space ~
50671 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50672 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50673 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50674 code or in the document
50676 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50678 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50679 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50680 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50681 scanned for the input files.
50682 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50683 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50685 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50686 compilation may fail for some documents.
50689 \begin_layout Section
50693 \begin_layout Standard
50694 Here you can insert your
50703 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50705 \begin_inset space ~
50709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50711 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50715 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50718 \begin_layout Section
50720 \begin_inset Index idx
50723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50724 Language ! Settings
50730 \begin_inset Index idx
50733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50734 Settings ! Language
50742 \begin_layout Subsection
50744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50746 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50753 \begin_layout Description
50755 \begin_inset space ~
50759 \begin_inset space ~
50762 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50764 You can find its actual translation status here:
50765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50767 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50773 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50779 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50780 LaTeX Language Support
50785 \begin_layout Description
50787 \begin_inset space ~
50790 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50791 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50792 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50793 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50810 The most widespread language package is
50815 \begin_inset Index idx
50818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50825 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50827 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50828 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50829 come with the alternative
50835 \begin_inset Index idx
50838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50840 packages ! polyglossia
50845 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50846 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50852 The available selections are described in section
50853 \begin_inset space ~
50857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50859 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50866 \begin_layout Description
50868 \begin_inset space ~
50872 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50873 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50874 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50876 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50880 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50884 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50886 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50890 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50891 that is used to switch to a different language
50892 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50893 to start the package
50897 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50898 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50902 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50903 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50906 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50910 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50918 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50926 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50929 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50931 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50935 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50953 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50954 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50961 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50962 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50967 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50972 , this setting is ignored.
50977 \begin_layout Description
50979 \begin_inset space ~
50983 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50990 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50991 Use this if the language switch set in
50995 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50999 's alternative command
51003 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51004 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51007 end{otherlanguage*}
51011 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51012 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51013 command toggles the package on and off
51014 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51015 Empty by default, as
51019 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51021 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51026 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51032 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51037 , this setting is ignored.
51042 \begin_layout Description
51044 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51046 \begin_inset space ~
51050 \begin_inset space ~
51053 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51057 \begin_layout Description
51059 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51061 \begin_inset space ~
51065 \begin_inset space ~
51068 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51074 \begin_layout Description
51076 \begin_inset space ~
51080 \begin_inset space ~
51084 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51086 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51089 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51090 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51093 to the document class options
51094 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51095 rather than the language package options.
51096 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51100 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51101 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51103 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51104 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51106 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51111 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51112 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51121 \begin_layout Description
51123 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51125 \begin_inset space ~
51129 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51131 \begin_inset space ~
51135 \begin_inset space ~
51139 \begin_inset space ~
51145 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51147 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51150 this option is set,
51151 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51152 the language switch defined in
51155 \begin_inset space ~
51160 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51161 to the document language.
51162 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51163 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51166 \begin_inset space ~
51171 or if a package resets the document language.
51172 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51173 usually should be the document language).
51174 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51175 documents start with the chosen document language.
51176 When this option is not set, the
51179 \begin_inset space ~
51184 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51186 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51189 \begin_inset space ~
51199 \begin_layout Description
51201 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51203 \begin_inset space ~
51207 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51209 \begin_inset space ~
51213 \begin_inset space ~
51217 \begin_inset space ~
51223 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51227 \begin_inset space ~
51231 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51232 Set document language explicitly
51238 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51240 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51246 \begin_inset space ~
51252 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51254 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51258 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51260 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51263 the end of the document.
51264 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51269 \paragraph_spacing single
51271 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51277 \begin_layout Description
51279 \begin_inset space ~
51283 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51285 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51289 \begin_inset space ~
51293 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51295 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51297 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51301 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51304 in a language different
51305 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51307 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51310 the document language will be
51311 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51312 marked (by default with a blue
51315 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51317 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51321 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51325 \begin_layout Description
51327 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51329 \begin_inset space ~
51333 \begin_inset space ~
51337 \begin_inset space ~
51340 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51341 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51342 switched via the operating system.
51343 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51348 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51349 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51354 \begin_layout Description
51356 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51358 \begin_inset space ~
51362 \begin_inset space ~
51365 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51366 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51371 \begin_layout Description
51373 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51375 \begin_inset space ~
51379 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51381 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51385 \begin_inset space ~
51389 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51390 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51391 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51393 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51397 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51399 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51400 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51402 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51403 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51404 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51406 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51411 \begin_layout Standard
51416 means that the cursor
51417 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51418 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51419 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51424 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51425 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51429 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51431 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51432 specific case always means: move
51436 in text (even if this means:
51442 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51443 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51444 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51445 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51446 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51458 \begin_layout Standard
51460 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51465 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51466 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51467 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51471 ) when coming from the left.
51472 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51474 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51475 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51476 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51483 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51487 \begin_layout Description
51489 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51491 \begin_inset space ~
51495 \begin_inset space ~
51498 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51499 separator alignment).
51500 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51505 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51506 (static) custom character here.
51509 \begin_layout Description
51511 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51513 \begin_inset space ~
51517 \begin_inset space ~
51520 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51526 \begin_layout Subsection
51530 \begin_layout Standard
51531 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51532 \begin_inset space ~
51536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51538 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51545 \begin_layout Section
51549 \begin_layout Subsection
51551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51553 name "subsec:General-output"
51560 \begin_layout Description
51562 \begin_inset space ~
51565 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51567 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51569 \begin_inset space ~
51575 For a detailed description see section
51577 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51582 \begin_inset space ~
51590 \begin_layout Description
51592 \begin_inset space ~
51595 Options Options for the program
51599 that is used for the export format
51604 \begin_inset space ~
51608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51610 reference "subsec:Export"
51615 Possible options are listed in the
51620 \begin_inset Newline newline
51624 \begin_inset Flex URL
51627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51629 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51639 \begin_layout Description
51641 \begin_inset space ~
51645 \begin_inset space ~
51648 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51651 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51652 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51654 \begin_inset space ~
51660 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51663 \begin_layout Description
51665 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51667 \begin_inset space ~
51671 \begin_inset Index idx
51674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51681 \begin_inset Index idx
51684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51685 Settings ! Date format
51690 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51691 \begin_inset Newline newline
51695 \begin_inset Flex URL
51698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51700 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51706 \begin_inset Newline newline
51709 For example the format
51710 \begin_inset Newline newline
51714 \begin_inset Newline newline
51717 prints the date as day/month/year.
51722 \begin_layout Description
51724 \begin_inset space ~
51728 \begin_inset space ~
51731 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51732 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51735 \begin_layout Subsection
51741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51743 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51748 \begin_inset Index idx
51751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51752 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51761 \begin_layout Description
51763 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51765 \begin_inset space ~
51773 \begin_inset space ~
51777 \begin_inset space ~
51780 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51785 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51806 are used for Cyrillic.
51807 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51820 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51822 sets up in the background.
51823 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51828 \begin_layout Description
51830 \begin_inset space ~
51834 \begin_inset space ~
51838 \begin_inset space ~
51842 \begin_inset space ~
51845 options They only have an effect when the program
51849 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51852 \begin_layout Standard
51853 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51854 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51855 manuals of the applications.
51858 \begin_layout Description
51860 \begin_inset space ~
51863 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51864 \begin_inset space ~
51868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51870 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51877 \begin_layout Description
51879 \begin_inset space ~
51882 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51883 \begin_inset space ~
51887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51889 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51896 \begin_layout Description
51898 \begin_inset space ~
51901 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51902 \begin_inset space ~
51906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51908 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51915 \begin_layout Description
51921 \begin_inset space ~
51924 command Command for the program
51926 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51929 that is described in the section
51931 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51936 Additional Features
51941 \begin_layout Standard
51942 There are additionally the following options:
51945 \begin_layout Description
51947 \begin_inset space ~
51951 \begin_inset space ~
51955 \begin_inset space ~
51959 \begin_inset space ~
51964 \begin_inset space ~
51967 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51985 to separate folders.
51986 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51988 \begin_inset Index idx
51991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51998 \begin_inset Index idx
52001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52010 \begin_layout Description
52012 \begin_inset space ~
52016 \begin_inset space ~
52020 \begin_inset space ~
52024 \begin_inset space ~
52028 \begin_inset space ~
52032 \begin_inset space ~
52035 changes Removes all manually set
52041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52044 \begin_inset space ~
52049 dialog when changing the document class.
52052 \begin_layout Section
52054 \begin_inset space ~
52058 \begin_inset Index idx
52061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52070 \begin_layout Subsection
52072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52074 name "subsec:Converters"
52079 \begin_inset Index idx
52082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52091 \begin_layout Standard
52092 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52093 from one format to another.
52094 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52095 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52102 \begin_inset space ~
52107 field and press the
52112 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52116 \begin_inset space ~
52121 drop-down list, modify the
52125 field and press the
52132 \begin_layout Standard
52135 Converter File Cache
52141 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52143 Maximum Age (in days
52146 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52147 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52150 \begin_layout Standard
52151 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52152 definition, is described in the section
52163 \begin_layout Subsection
52165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52167 name "sec:File-Formats"
52172 \begin_inset Index idx
52175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52182 \begin_inset Index idx
52185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52194 \begin_layout Standard
52195 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52205 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52208 \begin_layout Standard
52209 You can also define the
52211 Default output format
52213 that is used when you use
52215 View, Update, View Master Document
52219 Update Master Document
52225 menu or the toolbar.
52228 \begin_layout Standard
52229 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52240 \begin_layout Standard
52241 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52243 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52244 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52245 This is done by specifying a
52250 More about this is described in the section
52261 \begin_layout Chapter
52262 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52264 \begin_inset Index idx
52267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52276 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52283 \begin_layout Standard
52285 \begin_inset space ~
52289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52291 reference "tab:Units"
52295 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52296 and used in this documentation.
52299 \begin_layout Standard
52300 \begin_inset Float table
52307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52308 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52326 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52334 \begin_inset Tabular
52335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52336 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52338 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52492 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52763 scaled point (65536
52764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52831 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52955 % of original image width
52960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53044 \begin_layout Standard
53045 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53048 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53055 \begin_layout Bibliography
53056 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53057 LatexCommand bibitem
53064 The \SpecialChar LyX
53066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53069 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53075 \begin_inset Newline newline
53079 \begin_inset Flex URL
53082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53084 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53092 \begin_layout Bibliography
53093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53094 LatexCommand bibitem
53095 key "latexcompanion"
53100 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53102 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53103 Companion Second Edition.
53106 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53109 \begin_layout Bibliography
53110 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53111 LatexCommand bibitem
53117 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53120 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53124 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53127 \begin_layout Bibliography
53128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53129 LatexCommand bibitem
53138 : A Document Preparation System.
53141 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53144 \begin_layout Bibliography
53145 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53146 LatexCommand bibitem
53156 The \SpecialChar TeX
53160 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53163 \begin_layout Bibliography
53164 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53165 LatexCommand bibitem
53171 The \SpecialChar TeX
53173 \begin_inset Newline newline
53177 \begin_inset Flex URL
53180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53182 https://ctan.org/topic
53190 \begin_layout Bibliography
53191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53192 LatexCommand bibitem
53198 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53200 \begin_inset Newline newline
53204 \begin_inset Flex URL
53207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53209 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53217 \begin_layout Bibliography
53218 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53219 LatexCommand bibitem
53226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53228 name "Documentation"
53229 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53236 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53240 \begin_inset Newline newline
53244 \begin_inset Flex URL
53247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53249 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53257 \begin_layout Bibliography
53258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53259 LatexCommand bibitem
53266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53268 name "Documentation"
53269 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53274 how to use the program
53276 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53280 \begin_inset Newline newline
53284 \begin_inset Flex URL
53287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53289 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53297 \begin_layout Bibliography
53298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53299 LatexCommand bibitem
53306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53308 name "Documentation"
53309 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53314 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53320 \begin_inset Index idx
53323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53325 packages ! biblatex
53331 \begin_inset Newline newline
53335 \begin_inset Flex URL
53338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53340 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53348 \begin_layout Bibliography
53349 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53350 LatexCommand bibitem
53357 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53359 name "Documentation"
53360 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53365 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53371 \begin_inset Index idx
53374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53382 \begin_inset Newline newline
53386 \begin_inset Flex URL
53389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53391 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53399 \begin_layout Bibliography
53400 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53401 LatexCommand bibitem
53408 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53410 name "Documentation"
53411 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53421 \begin_inset Newline newline
53425 \begin_inset Flex URL
53428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53430 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53438 \begin_layout Bibliography
53439 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53440 LatexCommand bibitem
53441 key "makeindex-man"
53447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53450 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53460 \begin_inset Newline newline
53464 \begin_inset Flex URL
53467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53469 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53477 \begin_layout Bibliography
53478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53479 LatexCommand bibitem
53486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53488 name "Documentation"
53489 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53499 \begin_inset Newline newline
53503 \begin_inset Flex URL
53506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53508 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53516 \begin_layout Bibliography
53517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53518 LatexCommand bibitem
53525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53527 name "Documentation"
53528 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53533 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53535 \begin_inset Newline newline
53539 \begin_inset Flex URL
53542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53544 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53552 \begin_layout Bibliography
53553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53554 LatexCommand bibitem
53561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53563 name "Documentation"
53564 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53569 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53575 \begin_inset Index idx
53578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53586 \begin_inset Newline newline
53590 \begin_inset Flex URL
53593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53595 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53603 \begin_layout Bibliography
53604 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53605 LatexCommand bibitem
53612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53614 name "Documentation"
53615 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53620 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53626 \begin_inset Index idx
53629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53631 packages ! enumitem
53637 \begin_inset Newline newline
53641 \begin_inset Flex URL
53644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53646 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53654 \begin_layout Bibliography
53655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53656 LatexCommand bibitem
53663 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53665 name "Documentation"
53666 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53671 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53677 \begin_inset Index idx
53680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53682 packages ! fancyhdr
53688 \begin_inset Newline newline
53692 \begin_inset Flex URL
53695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53697 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53705 \begin_layout Bibliography
53706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53707 LatexCommand bibitem
53714 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53716 name "Documentation"
53717 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53722 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53728 \begin_inset Index idx
53731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53733 packages ! hyperref
53739 \begin_inset Newline newline
53743 \begin_inset Flex URL
53746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53748 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53756 \begin_layout Bibliography
53757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53758 LatexCommand bibitem
53765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53767 name "Documentation"
53768 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53773 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53779 \begin_inset Index idx
53782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53784 packages ! microtype
53790 \begin_inset Newline newline
53794 \begin_inset Flex URL
53797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53799 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53807 \begin_layout Bibliography
53808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53809 LatexCommand bibitem
53816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53818 name "Documentation"
53819 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53824 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53830 \begin_inset Index idx
53833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53841 \begin_inset Newline newline
53845 \begin_inset Flex URL
53848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53850 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53858 \begin_layout Bibliography
53859 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53860 LatexCommand bibitem
53867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53869 name "Documentation"
53870 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53875 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53881 \begin_inset Index idx
53884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53886 packages ! prettyref
53892 \begin_inset Newline newline
53896 \begin_inset Flex URL
53899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53901 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53909 \begin_layout Bibliography
53910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53911 LatexCommand bibitem
53918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53920 name "Documentation"
53921 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53926 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53932 \begin_inset Index idx
53935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53937 packages ! refstyle
53943 \begin_inset Newline newline
53947 \begin_inset Flex URL
53950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53952 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53960 \begin_layout Bibliography
53961 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53962 LatexCommand bibitem
53969 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53972 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53977 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53979 \begin_inset Newline newline
53983 \begin_inset Flex URL
53986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53988 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53996 \begin_layout Bibliography
53997 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53998 LatexCommand bibitem
54005 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54008 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54013 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54015 \begin_inset Newline newline
54019 \begin_inset Flex URL
54022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54024 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54032 \begin_layout Bibliography
54033 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54034 LatexCommand bibitem
54041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54044 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54049 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54050 for Cyrillic languages:
54051 \begin_inset Newline newline
54055 \begin_inset Flex URL
54058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54060 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54068 \begin_layout Bibliography
54069 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54070 LatexCommand bibitem
54077 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54080 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54085 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54087 \begin_inset Newline newline
54091 \begin_inset Flex URL
54094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54096 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54104 \begin_layout Bibliography
54105 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54106 LatexCommand bibitem
54113 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54116 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54121 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54123 \begin_inset Newline newline
54127 \begin_inset Flex URL
54130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54132 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54140 \begin_layout Bibliography
54141 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54142 LatexCommand bibitem
54149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54152 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54157 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54159 \begin_inset Newline newline
54163 \begin_inset Flex URL
54166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54168 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54176 \begin_layout Standard
54177 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54211 \begin_inset Note Note
54214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54221 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54222 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54223 bibliography is the second one:
54231 \begin_layout Standard
54232 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54233 LatexCommand bibtex
54234 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54235 options "biblio/alphadin"
54242 \begin_layout Standard
54243 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54247 \begin_layout Standard
54251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54257 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54266 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54274 \begin_inset Note Note
54277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54278 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54279 \begin_inset space ~
54283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54285 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54297 \begin_layout Standard
54298 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54299 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54305 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54306 LatexCommand printindex